You are on page 1of 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.

10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STANDARD

TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 WORK PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

2 MATERIAL HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

3 MARKING ON THE FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


3.1 Marking the standard floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 No Earthquake protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Earthquake protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Marking the raised floor for bottom cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Reduced cutouts (natural cooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Cable street (forced cooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Earthquake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Raised floor for top cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Extension B/E/Hfamily with Jfamily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Extension Jfamily with Jfamily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27
29
29
29
30
45
46
47
48
49
49

4 INSTALL POWER PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

50

5 MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Examples of MDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Grounding of MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

52
52
53

6 PLACING THE OPERATOR DESKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53

7 MOUNTING OF RACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Normal floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Installation without fixing to the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Installation with fixing to the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Installation with earthquake protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Raised floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Installation without fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54
57
57
58
59
61
61

10

020305

M.Kulosa ASEL

J. Neumann ASEL

09

020226

M.Kulosa ASEL

J. Neumann ASEL

08

000614

M.Kulosa ASEL

D.Soennichsen ASEL

ED

DATE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

CHANGE NOTE

A1000 S12 JFamily


Installation Manual
Mounting Instructions

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

1 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.2.2 Installation with fixing to the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


7.2.3 Installation with earthquake protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Mounting cable supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Installation of cable channels under the raised floor with interference field . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 Top structure for earthquake protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.3 Top structure without earthquake protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61
62
64
64
66
70

8 EXCHANGE FEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Top cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 Power feeding BAT1, BAT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Grounding with conventional exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 Power feeding BAT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Bottom Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Exchange of faulty fuses in the TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Wall Panel and Filter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 JRSU rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1 Power supply for two racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Pressing of press cable lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71
82
82
87
87
87
90
91
95
96
97

9 CABLE RUNWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Mounting of cable racks (CRK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Mounting of cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Optional cable grid (SEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.1 JRSU exchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 Optional top cable structure (FACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 Cable duct CABLOFIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

98
100
101
102
106
107
110

10 INTER CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 Top cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Rules of cable guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Intercabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 Bottom cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.1 Intercabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.2 Remote equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Cabling external clocksynchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113
114
114
123
125
125
125
126

11 MDF/DDF CABLING / MDF CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


11.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.1 Example for connection to MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2 Colour code for 128 pair system cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.3 Colour code for 64 pair system cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.4 Connection of line cables in case of JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.5 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.6 Connection of external alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Examples of difference MDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1 Connection block 71 (Krone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2 Connection block 95Q (Quante) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 MDF / LSAPLUS Profil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4 DDF information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.1 Example: DDF cabling / jumbering at LSAProfil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2 DDF cabling at wrapframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.3 DDF cabling with coaxcable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129
130
134
136
140
141
141
141
142
142
145
146
147
148
149
149

12 EXCHANGE CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 Cables to MDF/DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156
157

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

2 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

12.1.1 Top cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12.1.2 Top cabling with cable 128pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Bottom cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 Cabling to MDF/DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 Trunk cabling to DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

157
158
159
161
162

13 PERIPHERALS IN JK../JF..RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1 Installation of disk and formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.1 Installation of the magnetic tape unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.2 Cabling JK.. JF.. rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.3 Flat cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163
164
164
165
165
167

14 SUITE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.1 Extension on H or E family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2 Jracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 Covers on power rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4 Suite and rack labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4.1 CELabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.5 Interruption of suites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

168
169
169
169
171
172
172
173
173

15 ILLUMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1 Part of customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2 Number and positioning of lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.1 Installation of cable channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174
175
176
178

16 JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.1 Installation of JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.2 Install profil rails for illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.3 JRSU Exchange cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1.4 JRSU labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2 Mounting of MAAirbaffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

181
182
184
190
191
193
194

17 FINAL TOUCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

194

18 ANTISTATIC FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

196

19 THE MINI RSU / OUTDOOR JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

198

20 THE OUTDOOR JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

200

21 HOW TO USE THE S12 J FAM. MOUNTING MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


21.1 Definition of symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2 Prohibition symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.3 Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.4 Injunction symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.5 Indication symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.6 Documentation symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.7 Flow chart and drawing symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.8 Drawing layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.9 Action flow on drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207
207
208
209
210
211
213
214
214
215

22 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

3 / 246

215
216
217
217
218
218
226
226
227
229
231
231
231
231
233
238
238
238
238
238

23 DOCUMENT READING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.1 General documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.2 Cable connection list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.3 Cable placement list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.4 Rack layout list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.5 Explosion list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238
238
238
239
241
243

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

244

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

22.1 Environmental requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


22.1.1 At start of pre installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.1.2 At start of installation of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.1.3 At start of test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.2 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.2.1 Safety charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.2.2 Safety rules for equipment under tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.3 General workmanship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.4 Instructions for dowel setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.5 Instructions for drilling holes in concrete surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.6 Standard rules and conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.6.1 Separation of power and signal cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.6.2 Bending rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.7 EMC rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.8 Power and earthing rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.9 Reporting & administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.9.1 Progress and status reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.9.2 Problem reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.9.3 Spare management and ordening specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.10 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

4 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES


Figure 1. General workflow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2. Detailed workflow of work preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3. Detailed workflow material handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4. Detailed workflow of marking the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5. Detailed workflow of marking the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6. Cable street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 7. Cable street design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8. Cable street . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9. Cable street cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10. Adaptation of the tiles (extension case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11. Positioning of suites (1. start at the edge, 2. start in the middle of a tile) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 12. Positioning of the racks on the raised floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13. Arrangement of tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 14. Suite Mounting with Raised Floor (Tiles 600x600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 15. Stand alone racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 16. Earthquake protection/ cutouts for 450 mm rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 17. Eartquake protection/cutouts E/J rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 18. Detailed workflow installation power plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 19. Detailed workflow mounting of MDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 20. Detailed workflow mounting of MDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 21. Detailed workflow mounting of racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 22. Detailed workflow mounting of racks (contd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 23. Positioning of fixing plates and bracing bars for different row lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 24. Installation with standard support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 25. Supports and distance tubes for earthquake protection with cable ladder/grid . . . . . . .
Bild 26. Detailed Workflow Exchange Feeding (top cabling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 27. Detailed Workflow Exchange Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 28. Example: Power cabling with PRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 29. Power feeding with 2 power racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 30. Charging device for capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 31. Protection of the battery bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 32. Exchange feeding with power distribution box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 33. Detailed workflow for cable runways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 34. detailled workflow for cable grid (ASEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 35. detailled workflow for top cable structure (FACE, Cablofil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 36. Row configuration from1 to 6 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 37. Row configuration from 7 to 10 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 38. Detailed workflow for exchange cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 39. Standard intra rack cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 40. exchange dependent signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 41. exchange dependent power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 42. Detailed workflow MDF cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 43. Detailed workflow for exchange cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 44. General bottom cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 45. Detailed workflow for peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bild 46. Detailed workflow suite assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 47. detailled workflow illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 48. Positioning of lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 49. Cabling schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 50. Detailed workflow for JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 51. JRSU one shelf subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 52. JRSU two shelf subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ED

14
16
24
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
36
37
40
42
43
50
52
53
55
56
66
67
68
71
72
79
81
85
86
95
98
99
100
108
109
113
115
116
117
129
156
160
164
168
174
177
177
181
182
182

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

5 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 53. JRSU three shelf subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Figure 54. Subrack for Transmission Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 55. JRSU Rack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 56. Standard rack cable list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 57. Detailed workflow for JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 58. Detailed workflow for JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 59. Foundation outdoor JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 60. Fastening iron for outdoor JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 61. Lifting the outdoor JRSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 62. RAU JR05 (rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 63. Power Supply and distribution simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 64. FPE layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 65. Overall Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 66. Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ED

183
183
184
185
198
200
201
202
203
204
234
235
236
237

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

6 / 246

HISTORY

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Changes from edition 09 to edition 10:

new bottom cable entrance in endpanel with shielding tube

optional top cable structure FACE

remove item numbers

insert detailed installtion description of JRSU

insert detailed installation description of peripherals (flat cables with ferrites, MTUinstallation, disk
installation)

xxx

and insert official Alcatel partnumbers

PREFACE

Important :
Local safety requirements should be known and followed by the installation people. See also General safety instructions for Field operations. See also the safety charts in this manual when working
with Toxid products. (Chapter 21.2)

General safety information


Usage and Installation

Usage
The Alcatel 1000 S12 equipment is designed and built :

for commercial use in telecommunication centers

not for use in other environment

Installation of equipment
The Alcatel 1000 S12 equipment has to be installed by Alcatel personnel, under assistance of Alcatel
personnel or other well trained personnel, which have access to the relevant edition of the relating
Installation Manual.
The following instruction have to be observed when installing the equipment and later on when maintaining the equipment.
Personnel Qualification

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Service Personnel

ED

have to have electrical, electronically and systemspecific knowledge;

have to know the Alcatel 1000 S12 documentation, especially the safety instructions;

have to have appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing the task and measures to minimize the danger to themselves and other persons.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

7 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Instructed Persons

have to be instructed about possible hazards;

have to be instructed, not to touch bare parts of electrical circuits.

Access to the Alcatel 1000 S12 System

Access to the Location of Installation


The Alcatel 1000 S12 has to be installed in a location with restricted access (Restricted Access Location), so that access is controlled by the authority responsible for the location.

Access to the equipment


Access to the equipment itself is permitted for service personnel only.
Warnings for Potential Dangers
Dangerous voltages
Alcatel 1000 S12 is supplied by an external power
supply with a nominal voltage of 48V or 60V. If the
external power supply (not part of S12) does not
have an safely separation from hazardous voltage,
this hazardous voltage can enter the Alcatel 1000
S12.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage on the supply circuit may lead to


an electrical shock of operational and service personnel.
Alcatel 1000 S12 has to be supplied from an external power supply, which has a separation from hazardous voltage. The supply voltage of the Alcatel 1000 S12 (48V/60V) has to comply with the requirements for an Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV)
or Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV) circuit as specified in IEC 950 (EN60950).
Voltages above TNV limits

WARNING

Within Alcatel 1000 S12 some PBAs carrying internal parts with voltages above TNV limit (e.g. switching voltage of DC/DCconverters). Unintentional
contact of these parts is unlikely during normal servicing, but these parts could be touch by the IEC
testfinger. This is permitted only in a service access
area.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Voltages above TNV limits may result in a little electrical shock of operational and service personnel.
Front doors have to be locked.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

8 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

TNV Circuits

WARNING

Circuits with voltages exceeding SELV limits


(60V d.c. and 42,4V a.c. peak), but less then
TNV limits (120V d.c.; 70,7V a.c. peak and
ringing) may be touched in general.

Circuits with continuous ringing voltages exceeding TNV may be touched with the IEC
testfinger.

Both of these conditions may result in an uncomfortable feeling of electricity. This is permitted only in a
restricted access location.
The Alcatel 1000 S12 equipment has to be installed
in a restricted access location.
Earthing
Voltages exceeding SELV limits (60V d.c. and
42,4V a.c. peak), but less then TNV limits (120V
d.c.; 70,7V a.c. peak) may occur, if the system is not
connected to earth.

WARNING

This condition may result in an uncomfortable feeling of electricity.


The protective earthing terminal (FPE) has to be
conducted, before making any other connection.
Protection against energy hazards
Bridging of parts of circuits with high energy is possible with the IEC testfinger, but unintentional bridging is unlikely. (power exceeding 240VA; e.g.
48V/60V supply circuits)

CAUTION

When bridging parts of circuits with high energy, an


electrical arc may occur.
The Alcatel 1000 S12 equipment has to be installed
in a restricted access location.
Protection against energy hazards
Bridging of parts of circuits with high energy is possible during installation of conductors at EMCfilters with conductive tools under live conditions.
When bridging parts of circuits with high energy, an
electrical arc may occur.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

CAUTION

ED

The use of insulation tools is obligatory.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

9 / 246

Protection against spread of fire

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The Alcatel 1000 S12 has to have a fire enclosure.


With the doors opened, the fire enclosure is not
closed and if a little fire occurs, the spread of fire is
not limited.

CAUTION

After service and maintenance activities the doors


have to be closed immediately.
Protection against tip over
Stand alone racks are physical unstable and can tip
over.
Fixing the racks to the floor, to the ceiling, the wall or
mounting racks together in such a way, that avoids a
tip over, is necessary.

CAUTION
Hot parts

CAUTION

Some components on PBAs may be hot


(> 70C).

Some front heat sinks may be hot, too


(> 70C). These heat sinks are marked with
the symbol for hot parts.

Both of these conditions may result in an injury of


persons.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The Alcatel 1000 S12 equipment has to be installed


in a restricted access location.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

10 / 246

Redundant power source

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The system racks of the Alcatel 1000 S12 are supplied by two branches of power supply via a power
distribution rack or a wall panel.
Working under live conditions may result in :

CAUTION

an electrical arc, when bridging parts of circuits


with high energy

an uncomfortable feeling of electricity, when


touching TNV circuits.

To clear the racks from power, both branches have


to be switched off. On a label in each rack the marking of the relevant fuses in the power distribution
rack/wall panel are shown. Special care has to be
taken, if working under live conditions could not be
avoided.
Clear the whole system from supply voltage
The Alcatel 1000 S12 is permanently connected to
the central power supply (not part of S12) via two
branches.
Working under live conditions may result in :

CAUTION

an electrical arc, when bridging parts of circuits


with high energy

an uncomfortable feeling of electricity, when


touching TNV circuits.

To clear the Alcatel 1000 S12 completely from power, both branches have to be disconnected from the
power supply by external fuses, circuit breakers or
switches. On a label in the power distribution rack/
wall panel the marking of the relevant external
fuses, circuit breakers or switches are shown.
Special care has to be taken, if working under live
conditions could not be avoided.

CAUTION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Operation of circuit breakers


Contacts can weld together for the following circuit breakers (CB) if switched on under short circuit
conditions :
6 Amp
10 Amp

ED

1AB 05327 0002


1AB 05327 0003

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

11 / 246

Both CBs are located in Top Rack Units of S12 J family.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

By this welding together the protection function of the CBs will be disabled which can lead to permanent damage of the equipment installed, causing product liability issues for Alcatel. Therefore, the
following precautions have to be taken until further notice.
1)

If a CB will be switched on during the installation or test phase under short circuit conditions,
this CB can be damaged. For verification of a damage the procedure as follows has to be executed :

switch off CB by slightly touching the toggle/handle. Do not agitate, do not press firmly
!

If the toggle is not going in OFF position but stays in an intermediate position it is mandatory to immediately exchange the respective CB.

2)

If the CB has released but the related DC/DC converter still is working (LED on converter is on)
it is mandatory to immediately exchange the respective CB.

3)

After HW related maintenance actions, as a routine procedure before setting back the module
into operation, the CB functionality has to be checked. This has to be made as last action following para 1 ) of this document.

Spare parts of the CB are sent to the installation managers. Further supply can be requested under
...
Please remember :
IF DEFECTIVE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE NOT EXCHANGED THERE WILL BE THE RISK OF
FIRE IF LATER ON A SHORT CIRCUIT OCCURS !!!

About the S12 J fam. mounting manual


There are three volumes in the standard S12 J fam. mounting manual. Together with the related documentation listed in the references, they constitute a comprehensive guide for the physical installation of the ALCATEL 1000 S12 J fam. exchanges.
The first one (214 38390 AAAA AS ) contains all the detailed mounting sequences represented
graphically and is called the S12 JFAM. MOUNTING ACTIV..
The second volume, the S12 JFAM. INSTRUCTIONS and SUPERVISION (214 38390 AABA AS),
provides the foundation for the use, methods, workflow and all the needed documentation. You will
understand the concept of the manual by reading the How to use chapter of this manual.
Finally, the S12 JFAM. ITEM/TOOLINDEX (214 38390 AACA AS) will give a quick reference to
the tool and item numbers used during the activities.
Important remark :
Where an asterisk (*) is indicated on the mounting diagrams, different options are available and the
concerning info should be read in this document.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

The description how to use the manual, general requirements and the document reading are explained in the last chapters of this manual. (CHAPTERS 20, 21, 22)

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

12 / 246

Workflow generalities

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The workflow diagram shows all necessary operations for the equipment of a 1000 S12 exchange.
The order of numbers = operations

...

19

is only

a guiding principle and can change according to the material delivery.


= Non generic operations
Eg. - Customer specific
- Dependent on foreign delivery
- Dependent on Alcatel-Units
- Dependent on SUB-companies

Operations, general :

= New equipment

= Valid for total material delivery

Pre. Installation operations : These operations can as a rule be started without a rack

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Installation operations : Devices and material must be present before these operations can be started

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

13 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED


17

10

ALCATEL

ANTISTATIC
FLOOR

PREPARING
THE FLOOR

EXCHANGE
CABLING

12

MOUNTING
THE RACKS

POWER
PLANT

7
EXCHANGE
FEEDING

MDF

10

DESK

INTER
CABLING

PLACE C DOP
RACK

18

11

14

17

SUITE
ASSEMBLING

MDF/DDF
CABLING

13


WORK
PREPARATION

FINAL
TOUCH

PERIPHERALS

CABLE RUNWAY

9
ILLUMINATION

246

214 38390 AABA AS

Figure 1. General workflow diagram

MATERIAL
HANDLING

JRSU

16

15

GENERAL
OPERATIONS

PRE. INSTAL. OPERATIONS

14 / 246

not generic
different options

INSTALLATION OPERATIONS

TEST
OPERATIONS

1 WORK PREPARATION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This chapter is intended to assist the responsible site officer in making the correct preparations to install
the exchange in optimum conditions.
This chapter covers the following areas:

Building inspection.

Preparation.

Followup during installation.

Installation completion

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

15 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
10

ALCATEL

Check
construction
activities

Check
building
access

Check
safety
provisions

Check
sanitary
provisions

A1

A2

A3

A4

Check
office
availability

Check
cloak
room

Check
store
room

Check
tool
reception

Check
instrumentation

Check
MDF/DDF

Check
materials

A7

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A13

Check
specifications

Check
storage
materials

A14

A15

Work preparation

214 38390 AABA AS

246

Figure 2. Detailed workflow of work preparation

Check
room
dimensions
A5

Check
raised
floor
A6

16 / 246

See workflow

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A1
Check that the construction activities are finished.

All areas dustfree. (switching room, MDF room,...)

Plasterwork finished.

Windows, glasses and doors mounted.

Paintwork finished.

Air conditioning in working order.

Power available in all locations of the activities and connected to the main.

Grounding distribution finished

Illumination completed

Action A2
Check access to the building.

Approaches or ramps to the place of installation available.

Sufficient access for loading / unloading of equipment, crane and hoist.

Storing conditions available.

Action A3
Check building safety provisions.

Screening of holes and cable ducts.

Fire extinguishers available and revision updated.

Corrosive agents polluting the air, within the specified limits.

Banisters.

Locks in all rooms of the installation activities.

Telephone lines available.

Emergency exits and/or escape ladders provided.

Maximum load per square meter information available

Action A4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Check sanitary provisions.

Toilets

Working areas clean.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

17 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Resting room clean.

First aid box available and contents OK.

Action A5
Check rooms dimensions

Check if all dimensions are in accordance with floor plan.

Cable passages through walls and ceiling.

Action A6
Check raised floor.

Raised floor completely installed and free from obstacles.

Earthing of the floor. (if applicable)

Check that installation of the raised floor is in accordance with the distribution of equipment in the
floor plan.

Levelled floors

Floor is adequate to the load of equipment to be installed

Action A7
Check office availability.

Ambient light and overhead lighting available.

Table, armchair, files and telephone available.

Documentation, specifications and drawings filed in order.

Confidential documents and information must be stored in a locked drawer or cabinet.

Action A8
Check Cloakroom.

Check suitability for the actual number of persons.

Action A9
Check storeroom.

Check shelves required for storage of material.

Safety provided.

Action A10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Check tool reception.

ED

Check reception of common tools required during installation.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

18 / 246

Action A11

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Check instrumentation.

Check reception of required instrumentation and its date of calibration.

Action A12
Check MDF/DDF.

MDF and DDF available for cable connections.

Action A13
Check receiving of materials.

When receiving material mainly check 2 points:

a)

Whether the packing is not damaged.

b)

Whether the quantity of packages, boxes, cases and racks corresponds with the packing list.

Tick off the items on the packing list for received.

If the packing is not damaged sign off the packing list with following handwritten formulation: Received in externally good conditions with reserve for contents.

If the package is damaged, notify your supervisor or take action with the insurance company.

Check humidity indicators, and report if saturated.

Indicate discrepancies if any, and return the packing list to the driver.

With the aid of the packing list check whether all items correspond with the specifications. Check
item, type and quantity with material lists.

Check rack equipment with rack layout lists.


For info on rack layout list see chapter 22 : document reading

Take necessary action to complete the material before the end of the installation.

Action A14

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Check specifications.

Check spare parts of exchange with corresponding material lists.

Check frame, terminal blocks and jumper wires with MDF material lists.

Check cables and plugs with cable material list.

Check ironwork, shielding, rack cables, power cables, plugs, power rack and labels with ironwork
material lists.

Check all peripherals with exchange specification.

Check tools with tool material list.

Check software (tapes, discs, cartridges) with software specifications.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

19 / 246

Check Power racks, batteries and power parts with power station specifications.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A15
Check storage of materials.

Store the smaller parts in the storeroom and the larger parts in the place where they are used. Indicate missing or excess material, if any, in the relevant specifications.

Immediately remove empty packing material, such as wooden cases, triwall boxes, paper, etc. from
the rooms in order to prevent risk of fire.

Available

Usable

Safe

Remarks

Workspaces as per building and floorplan


requirements
1. Switching room
Access materials
Access persons
Room lighting
AC mains outlets (sockets)
Fire and smoke detection equipment
Plasters work
Window frames
Doors and locks
Cable passages through walls and
ceilings
Climatic environmental conditions
(airco)
Raised floor with earthing according 1000 S12 specs
If no raised floor, floor treated conform 1000 S12 specs
2. Other rooms
Access materials
Access persons
Cable ladders and supports
Room lighting
AC mains outlets (sockets)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Doors and locks


Plasters work
Window frames

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

20 / 246

Available

Usable

Safe

Remarks

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Rooms for personal care of the


field operations team (12m2)
Room for administrative activities
(12m2)
Secured place for the storage of
material meeting the climatic environmental specifications
Building earthing poles, lightning
protection
Emergency power source
Mounting and earthing of the MDF
and DDF
Running water and sanitary installations
Telephone line free of charge to
Bell Antwerp and to the local Bell
office for high quality telephone and
data communications
3. Batteries room
Access materials
Access persons
Room lighting
Cable ladders and supports
Doors and locks
Ventilation
Acid detector
Air tightness
Water supply and water drainage
4. Container Housing
Drainage and leveling of the site
Provision of access roads
Concrete foundation for the container, power generator, antenna
structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Suitable manhole under the container for access to outside plan


streetcable, power generator and
antenna feeder cable
Installation connecting pipes and
cable ladders from power generator, and antenna structure to manhole

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

21 / 246

Available

Usable

Safe

Remarks

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Provision of AC supply to the control cubicle of the power generator


Provision of an earthing pole
Hoisting facilities to place the container and the power generator on
the concrete floor
Suitable sun screen over container
and power generator
Lightning protection device
Telephone line with free of charge
connection to Bell Antwerp and to
local Bell office suitable for high
quality telephone and data communication
Room for personal care of field operations team and administrative
activities
Secured place for the storage of
small material (tools, test equipment, etc...)
5. Before start of test activities
Provision of sufficient number of
analog trunks and digital channels
with related transmission equipment to different routes
Provision of sufficient number of
free local telephone lines
6. Before cutover
Mounting and cabling of line protectors
Jumpering on MDF
Mounting and test of the transmission configuration and trunks in the
remote exchanges

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All activities related to the network


integration and the maintenance of
the exchange

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

22 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

2 MATERIAL HANDLING

Take into account the basic dimensions and weights.


Normal Jrack :
Average weight
Dimensions (shielded)
Suite end panel

300 kg
900 x 520 x 2200 mm
50 x 520 x 2200 mm / 70 x 520 x 2200 mm

Packed Jrack :
Average weight
Dimensions

360 a 380 kg
1120 x 790 x 2300 mm

JRSU subracks
With PBAs and converters
1shelf unit
2shelf unit
3shelf unit

874 x 385 x 253 mm


874 x 385 x 507 mm
874 x 385 x 761 mm

25kg
60kg
85kg

With PBAs and converters removed.


1shelf unit
2shelf unit
3shelf unit

874 x 385 x 253 mm


874 x 385 x 507 mm
874 x 385 x 761 mm

13kg
25kg
38kg

JRSU outdoor cabinet


outside dimensions :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

weight :

ED

height :
width :
depth :

1700 mm (included 80 mm socket)


1140 mm
540 mm

without equipment : 110 kg


full equipped :
350 kg

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

23 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
10

ALCATEL
246

214 38390 AABA AS

Figure 3. Detailed workflow material handling

Move
racks

Study
floorplan

Cut
steel
strap

Unscrew
covers

A1

A2

A3

A4

Material handling
2

Racks
vertical

Transport
wheels

Position
racks

A8

A9

A10

Remove
transport
covers
A5

Unpack
racks

Remove
transport
protectors

A6

A7

24 / 246

See workflow

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A1
Packed rack manipulation :

Move packed rack using tools and protections as indicated in figures.

Action A2
Study floorplan.

Check number of racks.

Check the front of the suites,indicated by a triangle,pointing to the first suite.

Check designation of suites (01,02,...) starting from first suite viewed from front side. Take suite number 49 for suite with JF and JK racks when they are equipped in another room. JF (Computer peripheral devices rack) JK (Magnetic tape devices rack)

Check designation of racks positions (A,B,C,...) starting from left,viewed from front side.

Check designation of position of other equipments (MDF, workstations, MPA...) given by suite number 50.

Check designation of rack types, using standard codes for rack types. All the allocated racks for an
actual installation must be designated by their mnemonic.

Check position of the first raised floor tile, and in some cases, the position of the half tiles when these
are used.

Action A3

Cut steel straps with the appropriate tool.

Action A4

Unscrew covers with electrical screwdriver and appropriate bit.

The screws which cannot be accessed or sit too tight to unscrew them with the electrical screwdriver
must be made available by means of an impact screwdriver.

Action A5

Remove transport covers.

Action A6
Unpacking the racks.

Cut wrapping material with general purpose knife

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A7

Remove transport protectors

Action A8

ED

Lift the racks to its vertical position.


10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

25 / 246

Action A9

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Adapt the transport wheels to the base of the rack.

Action A10
Moving the racks to the specified position.

ED

Roll the rack into the specified position in accordance with rack placement list and floor plan.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

26 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

10

ALCATEL

No
earthquake

Marking
standard floor

3.1
Marking the
standard
floor

214 38390 AABA AS

246

Earthquake

Marking holes for


earthquake profile

Figure 4. Detailed workflow of marking the floor

A.1

3.1.2

Marking
the floor

A.1

3.2.1.1
Reduced
cut-outs
(Natural
Extension
cooling) E/B/H-Fam.
with J-Fam.
3.2.1

Marking
Holes for
cut-outs

3.2.1.2

A.1

J-fam.-J-fam.
3.2
Raised floor
Bottom cabling
Cable street
earthquake
See next page

27 / 246

Raised floor Top cabling


See next page

1
2

Marking
Holes for
cut-outs

Sealing
Cut-holes

Drilling
Holes
A.2

A.3
Cutting Tiles

A.4

3 MARKING ON THE FLOOR

A.1

3.1.1

The valid floorplan determine the position and distribution place of suites.

ED

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

Figure 5. Detailed workflow of marking the floor

A.2

3.2.2.1
Extension
E/B/H-Fam.
with J-Fam.

3.2.2
Cable
Street
(forced cooling)

Marking
Cut-outs

A.2

3.2.2.2

J-fam.-J-fam.
3.2.3.1

3.2.3

Extension
E/B/H-Fam.
with J-Fam.

A.1
Marking holes
for earthquake
support

J-fam.-J-fam.
3.3.1

3.3
Raised floor
Top cabling
cable street

Extension
E/B/H-Fam.
with J-Fam.
3.3.2

28 / 246

J-fam.-J-fam.

A.1
Marking holes
for earthquake
support

Marking
Cut-outs
*
A.2
Marking
Cut-outs

Earthquake
3.2.3.2

A.2

Marking
Cut-outs
*
A.2
Marking
Cut-outs
*
A.2
Marking
Cut-outs

Sealing
cut-holes
A.3
Cutting
tiles

A.4

3.1 Marking the standard floor

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

3.1.1

3.1.1 No Earthquake protection

Protection against tip over


CAUTION

If a new row comprises only 1 or 2 racks, these racks should be fixed to the floor.

Action A1

Mark the rack position according to the floorplan.

Draw a axial line on the concrete floor.

Draw a parallel line at 188 mm of each side of the axis.

3.1.2 Earthquake protection


See workflow

3.1.2

Take necessary safety precautions

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A1

Mark the rack position according the floorplan.

Draw a axial line on the concrete floor.

Draw a parallel line at 188 mm of each side of the axis.

Place the earthquake profile on the marked lines, and mark the positon of the holes.

Remove the profile.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

29 / 246

3.2 Marking the raised floor for bottom cabling

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Earthing
WARNING

Since the raised floor has to be connected to the electrical ground, at least one connection per 15
or 20 m2 has to be made with a cable of min. 35 mm2 (daisy chain). This connection is formed by
attaching a ground cable to a pedestal. It is mandatory to have at least two earth connections per
room.

General remarks

Since the cutout may not compromise the load bearing capacity of the tiles, it may be necessary to provide extra pedestals and reinforced stringers.This means that each tile must be able
to sustain a point load, anywhere on the tile and concentrated on a 50 x 50 mm surface of :

300 kg, which does not result in a deflection of more than 2 mm.

600 kg, which does not give any permanent deformation.

Cutouts and cable channels should be made at row BEGIN if the number of racks in a row is
5 or less, in the main gangway.Cutouts and cable channels should be made at row BEGIN and
row END if the number of racks in a row is 6 or more.

Cable street
Together with the Jfamily, the cable street along the suite will be introduced by forced cooling and/or
underfloor cabling.

SWITCHING RACK

PDR

Figure 6. Cable street

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Preferred cutouts

A cable street is only used when a row has 3 or more racks.

A cable street is cut out over the entire possible length of a row. (Future extensions have
to be taken into account).The part where no racks will be placed should be covered.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

30 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

If the local situation calls for deviation from the standard rules, special fixing and cutouts
should be worked out. First verify whether the necessary requirements already exist.

Installation of the cable street

Additional to the rules fixed in the specifications 211 39700 AAAADS and 211 39700 AAAAQT for
the raised floor installation, the following measures are required for the cable street:

The pedestals must be linked by stringers.

For endpanel cabling the stringer is replaced by supplementar pillars (see sketch).

The tile strips must be fixed with spacers to provide sliding.


supplementary
pillars

cutout for end


panel cabling

see
detail A
stringers

pillar

DETAIL: A

spacer * for fixing the tile strips

*214 77384 AAAA or


made by the
floor supplier
stringer

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

concrete
Figure 7. Cable street design

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

31 / 246

front

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

stringers
pillars

complete
row
type 1.0

type 3.0

type 3.1

cutout must be covered with


214 44551 AACA or by the
floor supplier

uncomplete
row
type 3.2
2 supplementary pillars

endpanel
cabling
sytem cables
in raised floor

type 3.3

type 3.10

type 3.5

type 3.7

type 3.6

type 3.8

type 3.9

type 3.4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 8. Cable street

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

32 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

TYPE 1.0

ED

ALCATEL
TYPE 3.0

TYPE 3.3
TYPE 3.4

TYPE 3.7
TYPE 3.8

TYPE 3.1

TYPE 3.5

TYPE 3.9

214 38390 AABA AS

246

TYPE 3.2

TYPE 3.6

TYPE 3.10

Figure 9. Cable street cutouts

10

33 / 246

Cutout adaptation

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

In case of extension of a suite from 450 mm racks with 520 mm racks the cutouts in the tiles have
to be adapted by the floor supplier.
front

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 10. Adaptation of the tiles (extension case)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

34 / 246

4)

Positioning of the racks on the raised floor

New exchange

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

In lateral position the racks have to be positioned asymetric on the tiles (see Figure 12. on page 36).
Another positioning can be preferred taking account of local conditons. The suite starts optionally
in the edge or in the middle of a tile (see Figure 11. on page 35). The preferred distances R between
the rackrows and the nedded tiles are listed on figures Figure 12. and Figure 13. on page 36.

Suite extension

In case of suite extension from 450 mm rackrows with 520 mm racks the front side has to be in line.

Tiles of 600 x 600 mm and pitches of 1200/1300/1400/1500/1800 mm are supported. As the


S12 racks are designed for use on 600 x 600 mm tiles, it is recommended to use pitches 1200
or 1800. In this case only one type of tile must be present.

The standard pitch is 1200 mm. For pitches 1300/1400/1500, different tile sizes must be available, to allow the racks to be aligned on one tile. Consequently beside the standard 600 x 600
mm tile, extra sizes are needed.

For pitch

1300 mm
1400 mm
1500 mm

tile

600 x 100 mm
600 x 200 mm
600 x 300 mm

front

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Rack suite

raised floor in exchangeroom

Figure 11. Positioning of suites (1. start at the edge, 2. start in the middle
of a tile)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

35 / 246

rack
side view

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

front

raised floor

Figure 12. Positioning of the racks on the raised floor


preferred row distance R

1200 mm

1350 mm

1500 mm

1800 mm

2200 mm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 13. Arrangement of tiles

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

36 / 246

Standard pitch 1200 mm on tiles 600 x 600

75

front sheet
racks

E family

1200

75

450

center line of
tiles

free tiles

520

75

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

edge of tiles

1200

J family

520

75

under floor cable duct

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

J family

Figure 14. Suite Mounting with Raised Floor (Tiles 600x600)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

37 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

75

ED

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246
5

E
520

1800

1200

450

520

1500
1300
1400

100 *

75

75

200

300

75

450

75

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Pitch 1200/1800

Pitch 1300/1400/1500

Tiles of 100/200/300 must be adapted to allow the racks to be aligned on one tile.

10

38 / 246

5)

Stand alone

Positioning of the racks on raised floor

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

In lateral position the racks (maximum 2 racks) have to be centered on the tiles.The suite starts optionally in the edge or in the middle of a tile (see Figure 11. on page 35).

Preferred cutouts

520 mm rack (Jfamily)

The dimensioned cutouts for forced cooling and/or underfloor cabling are listed on Figure 10. on
page 34.

Stand alone fixing

When the fixing of racks on the raised floor is required the design shown on Figure 15. on page 40
must be used.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

39 / 246

front
stringers
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

pillars

type 1.0

type 4.0

type 1.1

type 4.3 type 4.4 type 1.2

type 4.2

type 4.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

endpanel cabling
system cables
in raised floor

type 1.0

type 1.1

type 4.1

type 4.2

type 1.2

type 4.0

type 4.3

type 4.4

Figure 15. Stand alone racks

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

40 / 246

6)

Earthquake protection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

In areas where earthquake protection is needed, the design specified under 211 03031 AAAAHD
for 450 mm racks and 214 32432 AXXAHD for 520 mm racks must be mounted in the raised floor.
The cable street has to be installed for all families.The installation measures described under 4.2.2
have to be respected. For more information about earthquake protection see specification 211 37152
AAAADS.

Positioning of the racks on raised floor

See remark C.

Preferred cutouts

520 mm rack (Jfamily)

A minimum width from 430 mm is required for the installation of the earthquake protection. The racks
must be centered on the tiles. The dimensioned cutouts are listed on Figure 16. on page 42.

E/J Rack

Title cutouts in raised floor for E/Jracks eartquake protection and under floor cable ducts.

Tiles 600 x 600

Suites Erack in center of the tiles.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The dimensioned cutouts are listed on Figure 17. on page 43.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

41 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

front

pillars

complete row

type 1.0

type 5.0

type 5.1
cutout must be covered with
214 44551 AADA or by
the floor supplier

uncomplete row

2 supplemantary pillars
endpanel cabling
system cables
in raised floor
type 1.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

stringers

type 5.2

TYPE 1.0

TYPE 1.1

TYPE 5.0

TYPE 5.1

type 5.3

type 1.2

TYPE 1.2

TYPE 5.3

TYPE 5.2

Figure 16. Earthquake protection/ cutouts for 450 mm rack

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

42 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 17. Eartquake protection/cutouts E/J rack

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

43 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7)

Forced cooling under raised floor

Typical figure for the pressure under raised floor is 18 20 Pa (Pascal)

Example :For clarification purposes, an example is given which also includes the influence of
the tile cutouts under the racks.

In addition to the dissipated power of the S12 equipment, extra power dissipation from the environment, lighting system, transmission equipment, etc. should be taken into account.To simplify the example these dissipations are estimated at 20 % of the exchange dissipation (to be
checked with the real situation).

For tile cutouts of 200 x 400 the air volume is estimated at 225 m3/h.
The calculation is then as follows :
E.g.

Dissipation of a rack
air density
temp. drop in cooler

= 1.5 KW
= 1.22
= 8C

In this example, the required air volume for 10 racks with a dissipation of 1500 W/RACK would be:
3.59 x 15000 W/1.22 8C = 5517 m3/h
Other dissipations :
5517 x 20 % = 1103 m3/h
Air volume of the tile cutouts :
(subtract) 10 x 225 = 2250 m3/h
Total : 5517 2250 = 3267 m3/h

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In this example, assuming the tile perforation allows 150 m3/h at 18 Pa, this would require 22 perforated tiles distributed over the room in addition to the tile cutouts under the S12 racks (figures to
be adapted to real situation).

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

44 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.1 Reduced cutouts (natural cooling)

Take necessary safety precautions

3.2.1.1 Extension B/E/Hfamily with Jfamily


See workflow

3.2.1.1

3.2.1.2 Extension Jfamily with Jfamily


See workflow

3.2.1.2

Action A1
Mark the cutouts in the tiles of the raised floor.
Action A2
Drill a hole of approx. 8 mm in the four mark corners. Use vacuum cleaner to remove dust.
Action A3
Cut the tiles with a JIG saw. Use vacuum cleaner to remove sawdust. Smooth away possible sharp edges
with wood rasp.
Action A4
To protect the cut sides of the tiles, they should be sealed waterproof and dustproof with an epoxy paint
(3 layers needed) or pedestal glue.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

The same cutouts are applied for all type of racks, except J7rack.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

45 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2 Cable street (forced cooling)

Take necessary safety precautions

After terminating all actions, the area should be marked off with safety ribbon open areas

REMARK :
Smooth away possible sharp edges with wood rasp.

Protection against tip over


CAUTION

If a new row comprises only 1 or 2 racks, these racks have to be fixed to the floor and a cable
street may NOT be used. In this case a plan to use reduced cutouts must be worked out.

3.2.2.1 Extension B/E/Hfamily with Jfamily


See workflow

3.2.2.1

3.2.2.2 Extension Jfamily with Jfamily


See workflow

3.2.2.2

Action A2
Mark on the floor the position of the cable street. (In total 280 mm width : cable hole ! 80 mm + hole for
forced cooling = 200 mm).
Action A3
Saw the tiles with a circular orjigsaw.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A4
To protect the cut sides of the tiles, they should be sealed waterproof and dustproof with an epoxy paint
(3 layers needed) or pedestal glue.
Remarks :

ED

As no stringers can be used at the row end, extra pedestals should be placed.
10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

46 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

= stringer
= pedestal

To prevent tile strips from sliding, a spacer 214 77384 AAAA or equivalent from floor supplier (280
mm) is placed in between.

For future extensions, the cable street should be cut out over the entire possible length of the row.
The part where no racks are placed should be covered with 214 44551 AADA or equivalent from the
floor supplier.

3.2.3 Earthquake


Take necessary safety precautions

After terminating all actions, the area should be marked off with safety ribbon open areas

REMARK :
Smooth away possible sharp edges with wood rasp.

3.2.3.1 Extension B/E/Hfamily with Jfamily


See workflow

3.2.3.1

3.2.3.2 Extension Jfamily with Jfamily


See workflow

3.2.3.2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A1

Mark the positions according the floorplan. In this case the racks must be positioned in the centre
of the tiles.

Remove the tiles for one suite.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

47 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Mark on the concrete floor the rack positions according the floorplan. Be sure that the rack positions
on the concrete floor corresponds with those on the raised floor above.

Draw on the concrete floor an axial line at 300 mm of the pedestals of the raised floor.

Place the earthquake support on the marked lines and mark the positions of the holes.The side of
the first support should be placed at the begin of the suite. (begin of a tile).

Remove the support.

Action A2

Mark the cutouts in the tiles of the raised floor.

Action A3

Saw the tiles with a circular or jigsaw.

Action A4
To protect the cut sides of the tiles, they should be sealed waterproof and dustproof with an epoxy paint
(3 layers needed) or pedestal glue.

3.3 Raised floor for top cabling




Take necessary safety precautions

After terminating all actions, the area should be marked off with safety ribbon open areas

REMARK :
Smooth away possible sharp edges with wood rasp.

Protection against tip over


CAUTION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

If a new row comprises only 1 or 2 racks, these racks should be fixed to the floor and a cable street
may NOT be used. In this case a plan to use reduced cutouts must be worked out.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

48 / 246

3.3.1 Extension B/E/Hfamily with Jfamily

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

3.3.1

3.3.2 Extension Jfamily with Jfamily


See workflow

3.3.2

Action A2
Mark on the floor the position of the cable street. (In total 280 mm width : cable hole ! 80 mm + hole for
forced cooling = 200 mm).
Action A3
Saw the tiles with a circular orjigsaw.
Action A4
To protect the cut sides of the tiles, they should be sealed waterproof and dustproof with an epoxy paint
(3 layers needed) or pedestal glue.
Remarks :

As no stringers can be used at the row end, extra pedestals should be placed.

= stringer

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

= pedestal

To prevent tile strips from sliding, a spacer 214 77384 AAAA or equivalent from floor supplier (280
mm) is placed in between.

For future extensions, the cable street should be cut out over the entire possible length of the row.
The part where no racks are placed should be covered with 214 44551 AADA or equivalent from the
floor supplier.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

49 / 246

4 INSTALL POWER PLANT

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Dangerous voltages
WARNING

48V

230/380 V

Cable connections
for MPR

Battery
mounting

A1

A2

Figure 18. Detailed workflow installation power plant


The Modular Power Rack performs the following functions :

monitoring of the charging and decharging process of the batteries

rectification of the mains. Maximum seven 25 A rectifier modules (DOLs) per MPR

Distribution of DC power to the different S12 racks in the exchange

In large offices several modular power racks are operating in parallel. (Max. 5 in parallel)
The DCdistribution connections to S12 stay within S12 shielded area. By this, the use of a power distribution rack or DC input filters for each S12 rack, becomes superfluous.
Since from each DCdistribution fuse 2 (up to 3) S12 racks can be fed, it follows that at least twelve S12
racks can physically be connected to one MPR. The real number of S12 racks which may be connected
to one MPR will be calculated based on the power consumption of the racks.Taking into account the worst
case voltage drop in the connection cables, the available output power useful for S12 racks is 7.5 kW.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fuses provided to feed S12 racks :

Branch A fuses : 6 x 63 Amps

Branch B fuses : 6 x 63 Amps

Additional circuit breakers are provided for :

ED

Rack and suite alarm lamps : 1 x 6 Amps


10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

50 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Master alarm panel(s) :

Peripherals :

2 x 10 Amps

2 x 20 Amps

For the connection of the batteries :

either all MPR racks are connected to one group of batteries

or each MPR is connected to a separate battery set

REMARK :
The cables to batteries are always placed with a positive potential cable followed by a negative cable.
DOLs need only be fixed if earthquake protection is required.
Replacing a DOL in operating condition

switch off DOL and remove AC and DC connection plugs

replace DOL and connect only AC connection plug

switch on DOL

connect DC connection plug

The MPR is in a normal S12 rack. For installation of the MPR refer to Positioning of the racks.
For torque of bolts and screws see chapter 22.
See workflow

Action A1
Connect AC power cable

fix cable lugs to the conductors of the cable

connect the 3 phases, neutral and safety ground

Connect battery power cable

Action A2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

check polarity of all battery cells

connect positive pole of battery to the positive output of the MPR

connect negative pole of battery to the negative output of the MPR

For right torque of connection see supplier installation manuals.

Installation of battery rack


All information documents about the batteries are supplied with the battery material (inside the boxes)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

51 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The documentation set contains :

technical features of the battery

mounting diagram of the battery rack

REMARK :
Any other type of battery may have different technical and installation features. Therefore carefully read
the accompanying documents before installing the battery set.
For different power plants consult suppliers installation manual.
REMARK :
For commissioning preventive maintenance and corrective maintenance refer to document 150 813000
XAAABGBE.

5 MDF

The installation of MDF depends on the type/brand of MDFsystems.


MDF

Examples
of MDF's

MDF 71

MDF 95Q

5.1

A1

A2

5.1.1

A1

Grounding

MDF LSAProfil
A3

OPERATOR DESKS

Example of
MDF-grounding

Figure 19. Detailed workflow mounting of MDFs

5.1 Examples of MDFs

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

See workflow

5.1

Action A1
MDF 71

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

52 / 246

Exchange side horizontal and line side vertical

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A2
MDF 95Q

For cabling the exchange and line side look the recommendation of installation guide by the producer.

Action A3
MDF LSAprofil

For more information consult suppliers installation manual.

5.1.1 Grounding of MDF


Action A1
Example of MDFgrounding

The ground connections have to be connected at beginning frame and end frame of MDF, if the MDF
has a length of more then 10 m, then additionally every 10m. The maximal distance of ground connection shall be 10 meter. The ground connections have to perform with min. H07VR50 gn/yel uninterruptable on shortest way to the ground ring bus respectively ground bar.

6 PLACING THE OPERATOR DESKS

The place for operator desk is normally in the first row next to JF..rack.
PLACING THE
OPERATOR DESKS
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 20. Detailed workflow mounting of MDFs

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

53 / 246

7 MOUNTING OF RACKS

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

General fixing rules


Fixing of standalone racks or suites of 2 racks.
a)

b)

c)

Top cabling for racks on normal floor.


1)

Cable grids over the racks are fixed to the ceiling > NO fixing to the floor is necessary.

2)

Cable grids are fixed with on top of the S12 rack. > Racks have to be fixed to the floor.

Top cabling for racks on raised floor.


1)

Cable grids over the racks are fixed to the ceiling > NO fixing to the floor is necessary.

2)

Cable grids are fixed on top of the S12 racks and the racks are installed in the center of tiles
> Racks have to be fixed to the tiles and the tiles have to be fixed to the pedestals.

3)

Cable grids are fixed on top of the S12 racks and the racks are installed over two tiles
Racks have to be fixed to the tiles.

>

Bottom cabling for racks on raised floor.


1)

The racks are installed in the center of tiles > Racks have to be fixed to the tiles and the tiles
have to be fixed to the pedestals.

2)

The racks are installed over two tiles > Racks have to be fixed to the tiles.

Fixing of suites (minimum 3 racks)


Suites with min. 3 rack will not be fixed to the floor.
Earthquake protection
a)

Installation on normal floor.

The racks will always be fixed to the normal floor.


b)

Installation on raised floor.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The racks will always be fixed to special supports in the raised floor.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

54 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 21. Detailed workflow mounting of racks

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

55 / 246

MOUNTING
OF RACKS

A1

Placing
racks

7.3.3

With earthquake
protection

7.2.2

Fixing to
the floor

A2

7.2.1

7.2

A3

Adjustable
foots

A2

A2

Mark and
drill holes

A3

A4

Adaption

A1

A4

A3

Drill holes

A5

Install racks
on profiles

A4

A5

A6

Place bars
on support Lift the racks

A2

Positioning the
Mark holes
racks

A3

Install profiles

A4

Fix the racks

A3

Connect racks Install


together
bottom plates

Install support
Place
chemical tube for threade rod

7.2.2.2

Over two tiles

7.2.2.1

Center of tiles

Adaption

No fixing

A1

Raised floor

7.1.3

Install
Drill the holes chemical tube

A3

A2

A1

7.1.2

With earthquake
protection

Adaption

Drill holes

Mark holes

Fixing to
the floor

A2

A1

7.1.1

A1

7.1

Adaption

Fixing on
ceiling

No fixing
to the floor

Adjustable
foots

Normal floor

A6

A7

Connect racks Install


together
bottom plates

A5

Fix the racks

A6

Screw
a pilot

A7

A8

A9

Connect racks Install


Adaption together
bottom plates

A4

Adaption

A5

Close
the holes

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 22. Detailed workflow mounting of racks (contd)

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

56 / 246

A2

Mounting
cable supports

7.3

A3

Mount cable
Mount cable
support in rack holder

7.3.3

Top cabling
No earthquake

7.3.2

Top cabling
Earthquake

7.3.1

7.3.2.2.1

With cable
ladder

7.3.2.2

With cable
grid support

7.3.2.1

7.3.3.2

Fixing to ceiling

7.3.3.1

A2

A1

A2

A2

Install
profiles

Install tubes Fixing to ceiling

A1

Install
profile rails

A1

A2

A3

Fix the
cable grid

A4

Cable grid
extension

A5

A6

Cable grid
interruption Lay cable bow

A3

Leave length
for extension

A3

Mount bracing
bars between rows

7.3.3.3

A1

A2

Extension tubes
and profiles
Extension tubes Connect profiles

A3

Install
profiles

A2

A1

A2

Mount
cross members

Mount profiles

A2

Mount cable
grid/support

A1

Mount bracing
barsupport

A1

Install
distance tube

Mount eathquake
support

A1

Mount eathquake
support

7.3.2.1.2

with standard supports

7.3.2.1.1

with bracing bars

7.3.1.1

Cable duct
Cable entrance
with shielding tube cable entrance on endpanel

Mount cable
grid support

Without cable
ladder/grid

A2

Mark and
drill the holes

Cable grid

A1

Cable channels
Mount
under raised floor cable ducts

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A1

Roll the rack in the specified position. See rack placement list and floor plan.

7.1 Normal floor


See workflow

7.1

Action A1

Align the racks and install adjustable foots if there is a level difference of more than 3 mm between
the racks.

7.1.1 Installation without fixing to the floor


Action A1

If Cable grid over the racks is fixed to the ceiling or wall, then fixing isnt necessary.

Action A2
Only for extension on H or Erack family.

Mount a specific support at top and bottom of the rack.

Hinge the rack adapter into the support and screw it to the rack upright at top and bottom.

Place the cross member according to rack adapter between top rack cover and cable channel.

Caution:

Pay attention for the completeness of contact springs and the correct seat in
their carriage on all doors, cable channels, covers etc.! Replace damaged contact
springs by new springs.

Action A3

In case of more than one rack, connect the racks together.

Action A4

lay bottom plates in the bottom frame and fix them in all 4 corners

Action A5

Close the holes for levelling plate screws with screws M10x20.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A6

To guide cables on bottom frame screw a pilot in the rack.

If no screw thread there, then use the screw thread for fixing bottom plate.

Not necessary at: 1st rack of suite, Frack, power rack (Zrack).

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

57 / 246

REMARK :

7.1.2 Installation with fixing to the floor


REMARK : Fixing to the floor is necessary, for configuration up to 3 racks, which are not fixed to the wall
or ceiling.

10

Item

81

110

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Actions A3 until A6 are valid for all following variants of rack installation.

Description

plastic dowel S10

Plain washer

Hexagon Wood Screw

Action A1

Mark on the floor the position of the holes.

Action A2

Remove the rack, drill the holes (10 mm) and put a plastic dowel in the holes.

Action A3

In case of an extension of Eracks with Jracks an adapter plate must be mounted.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A4

Position and align the rack(s).

Attach the rack(s) to the floor.

See 7.1.1 Action A3A6 for further actions.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

58 / 246

7.1.3 Installation with earthquake protection

Remove dust with vacuum cleaner.

insulating
plate

heat
shrinkable
tube

leveling
plates

mounting of shinkable tube at


least flush with the floor

5 max leveling

Drill the holes, diameter 18 mm, depth 125 mm.

65 max.
height above floor

holedepth 125
180 base material thickness minimum

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A1

Anchor mounting and leveling


+insulation arrangments

Action A2

Place chemical tube in the hole.

Use special tool to insert threaded rod.

Let the chemical substance harden.

Required temperature and time :


+20C and higher 10 min.
+10C to +20C 20 min.
0C to +10C 1 hour
10C to 0C 5 hours
Action A3

Fix profile to the threaded rods. Use leveling plates to adjust to roughness of the concrete floor.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In case of insulated installation:

ED

Fix the profile to the threaded rod together with insulating items (sequence : heatshrinkable tube
(6) insulating plate (5) plate (4) washer (3) hex. nut M16 (2) leveling plate (1)).

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

59 / 246

Install the heatshrinkable tube on the rod, at least flush with the floor.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Observe required tightening torque!


Action A4

In case of an extension of Eracks with Jracks an adapter plate must be mounted.

See 7.1.1 Action A3A6 for further actions.

Action A5

Lift the rack and put the spacer underneath. Place the special screw through plate, rack and spacer
and screw it loosely into the special nut.

Place rack on the aluminium profiles so the special nut slides into the bars.

Put the rack in the right position and tighten the bolts with a torque wrench.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

60 / 246

7.2 Raised floor

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

7.2

7.2.1 Installation without fixing


Action A2

In case of an extension of Eracks with Jracks an adapter plate has to be mounted.

Action A3

Install and use the adjustable foots if there is a level difference of more than 3 mm between the racks.

Caution:

In case of less then 3 racks must be always fixed.

7.2.2 Installation with fixing to the floor


7.2.2.1 Placing in the center of the tiles
Action A1

Roll the rack in the specified position. See rack placement list and floor plan.

Action A2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Mark on the floor the position of the holes.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

61 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A3

Remove the rack and drill the holes (5,5 mm).

Counterbore the holes at the underside of the tiles with a drill 12mm (depth 2 mm).

Action A4

In case of an extension of Eracks with Jracks an adapter plate must be mounted.

Action A5

Position and align the rack(s).

Attach the rack(s) to the floor

Action A6

In case of more than one rack, connect the racks together.

Action A7

Mount the bottom plate.

7.2.2.2 Placing over two tiles


Action A1*

Roll the rack in the specified position. See rack placement list and floor plan.

Action A2*

Mark on the floor the position of the holes

Action A3*

Remove the rack and drill the holes (5,5 mm)

Counterbore the holes at the underside of the tiles with a drill 12mm (depth 2 mm).

Action A4*
In case of an extension of Eracks with Jracks an adapter plate must be mounted.
Action A5*

Position and align the rack(s)

Attach the rack(s) to the floor

7.2.3 Installation with earthquake protection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

See workflow

7.2.3

Action A2

ED

Mark and drill the holes, diameter 18 mm, depth 125 mm.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

62 / 246

Remove dust with vacuum cleaner.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A3

Place chemical tube in the hole.

Use special tool to insert threaded rod.

Let the chemical substance harden.

Required temperature and time:


+20C and higher 10 min.
+10C to +20C 20 min.
0C to +10C 1 hour
10C to 0C 5 hours
Action A4

Fix support to the threaded rods. Use shims (1mm, 2mm or 5mm) to adjust to roughness of the concrete floor.

In case of insulated installation:

Fix the supports to the threaded rod together with insulating items (sequence : heatshrinkable tube
(1) insulating plate (2) difference plate (3) plate (4) washer (5) hex. nut M16 (6)).

Install the heatshrinkable tube on the rod, at least flush with the floor.

Action A5

Place the aluminium bars on top of the support. Place the strip for the tile support under the aluminium bars and level using shims.

Tighten the bolts with torque wrench. If bars need to be extended, it must be done in the middle of
a support.

Put the tile strips in place.

Observe required tightening torque!


Action A6

Lift the rack and put the spacer underneath. Place the special screw through plate, rack and spacer
and screw it loosely into the special nut.

Place rack on the aluminium bars so the special nut slides into the bars.

Put the rack in the right position and tighten the bolts with a torque wrench.

Action A7

In case of more than one rack, connect the racks together.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A8

ED

In case of an extension of Eracks with Jracks an adapter plate must be mounted.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

63 / 246

Action A9

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Mount the bottom plate. (Use this bottom plate for bottom cabling)

7.3 Mounting cable supports


See workflow

7.3

Action A2

Mount cable supports in racks


The cable supports used in Zrack are different from those used in the other racks!

Action A3

Install a cable holder (first and last rack of a suite)

At the first rack of a suite


At the last rack of a suite if cable duct under raised floor is installed at both sides of the suite
In case of underequipped suites, at the last rack for fixing the power cable for future extension.

7.3.1 Installation of cable channels under the raised floor with interference field
7.3.1

See workflow
Action A1

Install the cable ducts under raised floor.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A2
CODE

DIM A
DIM.

DIM B
DIM.

DIM (C)
DIM.

AAAA

830

415

AACA

1430

AAEA

830

PITCH

454

165

1200

229

454

165

1800

429

654

365

1200

MAX.

1214

229

715

1814

415

1214

DIM. D

CODE

DIM.
DIM
B

DIM.
DIM
(C)

MIN.

MAX
.

AAAA

830

415

1214

229

AACA

1430

715

1814

AAEA

830

415

1214

ED

DIM (E)
DIM.

MIN.

DIM.
DIM
A

DIM. D

Shown

DIM.
DIM
(E)

PITCH

NOTE

454

165

1200

For all other information see code AAAA

229

454

165

1800

For all other information see code AACA

429

654

365

1200

For all other information see code AAEA

Place cable duct with support on the concrete floor and mark the holes of the support.
10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

64 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Remove cable duct with support.

Drill the holes ( 10 hole depth min. 50)

Remove dust out of the holes.

Place the dowel.

Place the insulation plate.

Mount cable duct.

7.3.1.1 cable duct under raised floor with shielding tube


Action A1
Cable entrance for continuing connection with shielding tube

Connect zipper tube on cable duct.

Fix zipper tube with tiewraps.

Action A2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Cable entrance on endpanel side with shielding tube

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

65 / 246

7.3.2 Top structure for earthquake protection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.3.2.1 Without cable ladder/grid


See workflow

7.3.2.1.1

7.3.2.1.1 Installation with special supports and bracing bars

bracing profile
214 16811 AAAA
sheet 1
fixing plate between 2 racks
214 80814 AAAA
sheet 1

fixing plate at the end of the row


214 80809 AAAA
sheet 1

fix the bracing bars at the same


of the top cable duct
(if only one is equipped)

Figure 23. Positioning of fixing plates and bracing bars for different row lengths
Action A1

Mount bracing bar supports together with support for end panel (end + begin of row).

Action A2

Mount bracing bar supports together with cross members (between two adjacent racks).

Action A3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Mount bracing bars between two rows.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

66 / 246

7.3.2.1.2 Installation with standard supports

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

7.3.2.1.2

cable channel

profile fixed on support

Figure 24. Installation with standard support


N.B.

Support should be mounted on each end of row and max. 4 racks should be linked to
the support.

Action A1

Install the supports together with upper support for end panel (end + begin of row).

Action A2

Mount the profiles between the rows.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A3

Leave 200mm for further extension.

Leave 80mm for final installation.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

67 / 246

7.3.2.2 Installation with cable grid support

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

number of racks
number of grid supports
number of space tubes
rack

B
2

1
B

4
5

grid support

A
Profiled rail for fixing
of racks

10

distance tube *

11

12

13

14

15

16

A
C

...
front side

Colour: grey

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

* distance tubes

214 76089 AB A A
214 76089 AB B A
214 76089 AB C A

863 mm
1679 mm
1763 mm

Figure 25. Supports and distance tubes for earthquake protection with cable ladder/grid

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

68 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

7.3.2.2

Action A1

Mount cable grid support (together with support for end panel if begin or end of a row)

Action A2

Mount distance tube.

between 2 racks

at the first and last rack in the row

Install plates (214 76081 AAAA) for adjusting.

Aktion A3

Install the profiles to all grid supports. Leave 200 mm for further extensions and 80 mm for final installation.

7.3.2.2.1 With cable ladder


See workflow

7.3.2.2.1

Action A1

Mount cable grid support (together with support for end panel if begin or end of a row)

Action A2

Install the profiles to all grid supports.

Aktion A3

Fix the cable ladder on profile rails.

Aktion A4

Connect the extension ladder.

Action A5

Interruption the cable grid from system grid to wall.

Action A6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Lay all cable in bow (min. 200mm) and tie up them before and behind the bow.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

69 / 246

7.3.3 Top structure without earthquake protection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

7.3.3.1 Cable grid


The typ of cable grid is customized
See workflow

7.3.3.1

Action A1

Mount cable grid support (together with support for end panel if begin or end of a row)

Action A2

Install profile rails at the supports.

7.3.3.2 Fixing to ceiling


If stand alone racks or suites <3 racks are installed the racks have to be fixed.
See workflow

7.3.3.2

Action A1

Install aluminium tubes with clamps and angle on the profiles at the supports or on the tube.

For the specified tube distance use a crossbar as a gauge.

Action A2

Mount the fixing to the ceiling.

2 possibilities are available


a)
b)

fixing with hammerhead screws if profiled anchor bar in the ceiling is provided
fixing with FZA anchor dowel > see mounting instructions chapter 9.3

7.3.3.3 Extension of tubes and profile rails


See workflow

7.3.3.3

Aktion A1

Screw tube joints at the between the tubes. Drill holes ( 6mm ) through tube and joints and install
sleeves in the holes.

Aktion A2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

different profile connections

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

70 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

Wall panel

EXCHANGE
FEEDING
8.3

8.2

Bottom cabling

8.1

Top cabling

A1
Bridging

Power
Feeding
Bat 1

A1

Connection

Charging

A1

Mount extension
BATRET plate

A4

A5

Covering
BAT

A2

Safety
rules

8.1.1.2

Connection
on BATRET plate

Dicharging

A3

A1
A2

Power
cabling

installation
connection
bar

8.1.3

8.1.2

Grounding
with convential
exchange

8.1.1.1

Charging
device

8.1.1

Power
Feeding
BAT1, BAT2

48V
60V

Insulation
tool

A1

48V

60V

A8

A2
PRA
Labelling

A10

A9

Intermeshed
electronic ground

Cabling
of racks

In case of
extension

A7

Cable holder
last rack

Connection to
filter

A6

JZ

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

8 EXCHANGE FEEDING

Bild 26. Detailed Workflow Exchange Feeding (top cabling)

10

71 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Bild 27. Detailed Workflow Exchange Feeding

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

72 / 246

Exchange
feeding

8.4.1
Exchange
feeding

A1

Connection
PDB

JRSU
rack cofiguration

8.3

A1

Different
fuses

Exchange
fuses

Wall panel
Filter unit

A1

A1

Mounting
BATRET plate

8.2.1

8.2

Bottom
cabling

8.1

Top
cabling

A2

Ground
BATRET

A4

8.5

Pressing of
cable lugs

Cabling
below

A3

A5

Preparation

A1

Connect
on fuse

Connections
BAT/BATRET

A2

A5

A2

Press
check

A6

Circuit
breaker

A6

A7

A8

Covers

A7

A8

Labelling

A9

Door inside

A9

Connecting
EGcables

Connecting bat.
return cables

Connecting
48V/60V cables

Clamping cables
in rack

Placing
power cables

PDB top
cabling

A4

A4

Heinemann Heinemann
old version

A3

Connecting main
power cables

A3

Cutting
power cables

Airpax

A2

A2

Mounting
ext. plates

Ext. filter
connection

A15

A10

Install
filter unit

A10

A11

Cable
clamp

A14

Power
feed

A13

A12

Remove
BAT/BATRET

Separate
power cable

A11

Filter
connections

Marking rack
position on
label

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

GENERAL NOTES

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Power rack PRA


The power racks are available in different type versions. Each PRA type is equipped with its specific fuses
and power cable connections. Depending on the usage, different cable clamps and connection plates can
be used.
LINKAGEDIMENSION
JZ00RACKS / MAX.

2 x 4 x 300 mm2 or 2 x 2 x 240 mm2 BAT


2 x 4 x 300 mm2 or 3 x 240 mm2 BATRET

NHFUSES
NHfuses, for protection of power lines will be used as follows :
exch. with voltage 60 V using 50 A fuse
exch. with voltage 48 V using 63 A fuse
BAT, BATRET CONNECTING PLATES
To be used for long distance and/or power consumptions.
Connecting plates are provided with cable clamps, dimensioned for cable cross sections 120300 mm2.
Connecting plates will be mounted at installation site.
Main power supply

The main power supply will be installed by a component company to be determined by the commissioner.

Connecting points are on the connecting plate with cable clamps which can take four power cables.

Dimension of cable clamp 120 mm2 until 300 mm2.

By using cables with cross section smaller than 120 mm2 cable lugs have to be used.

The main power supply will be connected in an unscreened area of the power rack.

Power cables BAT and BATRET branch

Power cables are routed in cable channels (screened area) along the side of the power rack position.

Norms of power cables :

Designation :

a)

BAT at power rack and at each rack

BAT (L)
BATRET (L+)

H07VR25
H07VR95

example:
A 01

AA 01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Circuit branch A
Filter 1

b)

ED

BATRET at power rack and at each rack with L+ and green/yellow (gn/yel).

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

73 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

EG intermeshing (electronic ground)

norm of power cable : H07VR16

routing within cable channel between suites

each rack per suite will be intermeshed to the rack in front and behind the suite (except PRA)

the EG intermeshing includes all racks which are feed from the same power rack

additional power racks have to be connected by a 2 x H07VR95

Interconnecting PE (Potential earthing)


If there is conventional exch. together with DIV S12 in the same room, or a 2nd power rack exists, two
connecting cables H07VR95 (95 mm2) have to be installed to connect them.
The connecting points are :

on DIVS12 to power rack (connecting plate) to next PRA.

on conventional exchange (EMD) to the main power supply.

Cable clamps
Racks are premounted with power cables to feed them to the power supply by means of cable lugs.
Torque dimension for lugs :
small clamps :

10 Nm

16/25 mm2 cables

large clamps :

20 Nm

95 mm2 cables

clamps power supply :

40 Nm

240 mm2 cables

BATRET cables have to be connected together by a cable clamp on each rack.

On every suite BATRET cables 2 x H07VR95 will be put as a bus for connecting the racks. Used
cable lugs have to be controlled for damage before the will be reused.

Peripherals
PC, MOD and PRI have to be feed with an interruptible 230 V/AC voltage.There are two possibilities :
Either: An inverter FS 540 is installed which feeds the peripherals (PS, MOD, PRI) with 230 V/AC voltage.
The converters will be mounted on a rack delivered by customer.
Or: An interruptible 230 V/AC network is already installed in the exchange.The interface of this network
is the socket at the operator desk.
Cable types for power supply to inverter :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

INPUT
: H07RNF 2 X 4 mm2 OR H07RNF 2 X 6 mm2
OUTPUT : NYM 3 X 1,5 mm2
NUMBER OF S12 40 RACKS PER FEEDER OF 240 MM2
Determining the maximum number of racks per feeder of 240 mm2

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

74 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The maximum number of half racks (A branch, B branch) that can be powered per feeder of 240 mm2
partly depends on the length of the feeder and on the type of exchange (ELC/JFAM or ALIC). In Table
1 this number is given for ELC/JFAM and ALIC exchanges and in Table 2 for mixed exchanges. Where
the maximum number is exceeded, an additional feeder of 240 mm2 shall be provided.
n = number of feeders
hR = number of half racks
L = feeder length

hR * L
FORMULA : n =
X

Max. voltage drop * 240

Feeder diameter = 240 mm

X=
0.021

I/hR :

* I/hR

for ELC/JFAM = 750 W / 38.4 V = 20 A


for ALIC
= 500 W / 38.4 V = 13 A

With a max. voltage drop of 2.4 V


X = 1371 for ELC/JFAM
= 2110 for ALIC

From this follows the following table per feeder of 240 mm2 with max. 355 A fuse per feeder
TABLE 1
Feeder length
<=

50
60
70
80
90
100

ELC/JFAM # hR/feeder

ALIC # hR/feeder

24
22
19
17

30
30
30
26

15
13

23
21

For mixed exchanges, a fictitious number of half racks can be determined by means of the following formula :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

hR_fictitious  hR_ALIC_real  3 * hR_ELC_real  3 * hR_JFAM_real


2
2

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

75 / 246

The following table then indicates the maximum number of half racks per feeder of 240 mm2

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

TABLE 2
Feeder length
<=

50
60
70
80

Number of hR fictitious
m

30
30
30
26

90
100

23
21

Throughstrapping of power branches


Throughstrapping of power branches is admissible in so far as the values indicated in the tables are not
exceeded.
Furthermore, it shall be checked whether the power consumption is less than the fuse value as these values are reached in the case of a power failure and changeover to batteries.
E.g. 30 fictitious racks x 13 A = 390 A
In this case a tolerance of 3% is permitted.
EXTENSION OF ALIC EXCHANGES WITH ELC RACKS/JFAM RACKS
Procedure for connection of COMMON GROUND to SAFETY GROUND in ALIC PD racks for extension
with ELC racks.
For the first extension with J/ELC racks the following cables have been added to the parts list of the power
cables :

2 m wire (35 mm2) 21100291 BEAA (BOTTOM cabling)


or

3 m wire (35 mm2) 21100291 BEAA (TOP cabling)

Method
Using insulated tools, carry out the following actions in the presence of a HARDWARE tester :
1)

In the PD rack you first remove the SG cable coming from the POWER PLANT on the side of
the SG board. Use insulated tools (wrenches and screwdrivers) for removing the screws and
washers and avoid making any contact with metal parts during this operation! Take the cable
by its insulation and remove it with a sudden movement so as to minimize possible sparks.

2)

Using a DIGITAL multimeter 3.5 Dig. perform the following measurements :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

a)

Measure the voltage between the SG board and the previously removed SG wire.

The voltage measured should not exceed 10 mV. If a higher voltage is measured, the fault (voltage
leak to the ironwork) must first be rectified.
b)

ED

Measure the voltage between the SG board and the BATRET board.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

76 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The voltage measured should not exceed 10 mV. If a higher voltage is measured, the fault (voltage
leak to the ironwork) must first be rectified.
3)

Connect the SG board and one of the BATRET cables with a JUMPER cable of 35 mm2 by
means of a PFISTERER clamp.

4)

Using the multimeter, perform the following measurements :


a)

Measure the voltage between COMMON GROUND (battery ground) and the ironwork.
Repeat the measurement on several points.

The voltage measured should not exceed 0.5 V. If a higher voltage is measured, the fault must first
be rectified.
b)

Measure the voltage between 2 RACKS in the COMMON GROUND network.

The voltage measured should not exceed 0.5 V. If a higher voltage is measured, the fault must first
be rectified.
5)

The SG cable may now be either removed or insulated and left in its place.

Coupling between ALIC and ELC PD racks.


6)

Connect the ALIC BATRET cables to the ELC BATRET cables.

REMARK : Only 1 power supply


If in a JZ00 rack fuses 2334 are used and only one power supply with one fuse (max. 500 A) is available,
a strap between BAT1 and BAT2connections at JZ00 rack have to be made. Straps between BAT1
and BAT2 must have the same cross section as the main power cables (min. 2 x 95 mm2)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Examples for power supply :


a)

one cable per power supply

b)

two cables per power supply

c)

three cables per power supply

d)

four cables per power supply

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

77 / 246

main supply
BAT1

main supply
BAT2

11
12
13
17
18
19

16
15
14
22
21
20

23
24
25
29
30
31

28
27
26
34
33
32

BBranch

fuses 1..10
for peripherals

A Branch

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Fuse alignment in PRA

Beschreibung

PRA JZ00

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 1

ED

Fuse alignment in PRA

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

78 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

Branch line (equipment of rack)

EGline

Grounding cable (FE) to next power rack 2x H07VR95 bk

EGstrap (equipment of TRU)

BATA, BATB, H07VR25 bk (L conductor)

01A

02A

PRA

03A

BATRET 2x H07VR95 bk (L+ conductor)

row 01

row 02

row 03

10

01B

02B

03B
3

01D

02D

03D

BATRET main supply (L+) H07VR16..300

Bus bar (equipment of rack)

Cable clamp

10 Interconnection cable from PRA to EVT or DDF H07VR95 bk

BAT main supply (L) H07VR16..300

01E

02E

03E

Bus bar (equipment of PRA)

01C

02C

03C

01F

02F

03F

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Power cabling with power rack (JZ00)

Bild 28. Example: Power cabling with PRA

10

79 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

row 02

ED

ALCATEL
SP1

SP2

01A

BATRET

SP3

BAT branchoff
to next suite, see
following pages

BATA

246
01B

BATRET
H07VR95

BATB
BATRET

BATA
H07VR25
BATB
H07VR25

02B
SP2

02A

BATB
BATRET

BATA

BATRET

BATB

02C

BATRET

BATB

BATA

214 38390 AABA AS

BATA

BATB

02D

01D

BATRET

BATB

cable clamp

BATRET

Branchoffs
BATA / BATB
H07VK4

BATA

SP1 = Feed 1 (BATA / BATB)


SP2 = Feed 2 (BATA / BATB)
SP3 = Feed 3 (BATA / BATB)

01C

BATRET

BATB

Branchoffs
BATRET
H07VR35

BATA

GR

BATA

BATA

BATB

01E

BATRET

02E

BATRET

BATB

Extra cable in case


suite is not fully utilized

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Power cabling for protection of racks over two rows with one pair of fuses in the PRA

PRA

row 01

Power cabling for protection of racks over two rows with one pair of fuse in the PRA

Any fuse in the power rack not utilized to its full capacity at the end of a suite may be loaded with
additional racks of the next suite. Max. 3 racks with one pair of fuse.

If another suite is connected, one of two connecting options may be employed (see following pages).

The directives governing the maximum length of feed lines to the racks and the maximum load that
power racks may be subjected to (726 01055 CAABPW) must be adhered to.

10

80 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Power Rack

row xy

ALCATEL

row xx

214 38390 AABA AS

246
A 01

SP1

SP. .

SP12

B 01

BATRET

BATA

BATA

BATB

BATA

2 x H07VR95

BATB

BATB

SP1 = Feed 1 (BATA / BATB)


SP ..= Feed .. (BATA / BATB)

BATA

BATB
H07VR25

BATA
H07VR25

B XX

A XX

BATA
BATRET

BATB

B XY

BATRET

2 x H07VR95

BATA

BATRET

BATRET

SP1

BATRET
2 x H07VR95

A XY

SP2

SP. .

BATRET

BATB

C 01

BATRET

BATB

H07VR35

C XX

BATRET

C XY

BATRET

BATB

D XX

BATRET

BATB

D 01

Power Rack Area 2

BATA

Power Rack Area 2

D XY

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Power feeding of a suite with 2 power racks

If more than one power rack is used, the BATRET cable has to be linked as shown below.

Power Rack

Connection between the two


power racks with 2 each H07VR95

row 01

Bild 29. Power feeding with 2 power racks

10

81 / 246

8.1 Top cabling

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

8.1.1 Power feeding BAT1, BAT2


See workflow

8.1.1

Action A1

Mount the BATRETconnection bar on top of the rack. Tighten screws with torque wrench.

Mount the rearcover plate on bottom of the rack.

Mount the plastic covers (fire protection cover) and cover inner box on bottom in front of the rack.

Action A2

Mount the extension BATRETconnecting plate to BATRETconnecting bar. Tighten screw with
torque wrench 70Nm.

Mount the both extension BATconnection plates at the BATfeeding bars on top of the rack.

The plastic insulation covers should be mounted after the connection of the main power cable.
For more details of mounting for covers see chapter 13.1.1

Action A3

The main power cables have to be laid to PRA on a separate cable grid. Take a bending tool for bending of cable with a cross section 180 mm300 mm.

Mark, cut and strip the cable at the connecting points.

Tighten the cable clamps with 40 Nm.

Mark BATcables with marking tape L .

Mark BATRETcable with L+ and green/yellow tape.

Action A4

At the BATRETconnection plate are 7 connection types for grounding conductors with cable lugs
95 mm2.

Tighten screw with torque wrench 40Nm.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Connection :

12

to conventional area

entry distributor

45

from preceding PRA

67

to next PRA

815

BATRET for main power cables

Connection at BATRETconnection plate :


1629

ED

to rack rows

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

82 / 246

Action A5

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

BATplates, left and right, will be covered with a PVChousing. The housing will be fixed with 4 clips.

Action A6

Measure the cable distance between PRA and rack/suite and compare the length of cable with the
delivered lengths to avoid a waste of cable.

Strip cables and press on the cable lugs.

Turn back the hex. nut at filter approx. 2mm.


Tighten all connections to 8 Nm using torque wrench. When providing connection hold
lock nut with an openend wrench so that no torque is transmitted to the ceramic parts
of the filter.

Connection of an additional BAT cable at an output filter


Caution:

Use insulated tools if the filters above resp. below are under tension. Install a
cover cap and acorn nut to avoid shortcircuits.
In addition, the Guidelines for Workplace Safety, Health, and Fire and Environmental Protection on Electrical Systems at Open Circuit shall be adhered to.

Connection of an additional BAT cable under live voltage

The branch terminal for connection of a second BAT cable shall be mounted in the top rack area of
the power rack.

Lay cables in the cable channels at front side of racks and between the suites. No cable ties will be
used on condensed areas.

Care must be taken for dont damage the cables during the installation of rack grid covers and of
cable duct brackets.

For the protection of the BAT, BATRET and the INTERRACKcables against damage a protection
profile has to be installed at the borders of the cable duct. On top of that, a correctly contact by contact
springs has to be ensured.

If the cables will be damaged by the stiffening sheet of grid cover, a protection profile has to be
installed.

Action A7

In case of underequipped suites, install a cable holder at the last rack for fixing the power cable for
future extension.

If incomplete suites BATRETcables have to be laid in a loop in the rack endpanel and will be fixed
to the cable holder.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Warning: danger of short circuit!


For protecting of cables the charp edges should be covered.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

83 / 246

Action A8

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Connect the toprack cable with cable clamps to power supply cables (BATA/B with clamp
1695/635rm and BATRET with clamps 3595/1695rm). Install a cable clamp to make a parallel
connection between 2 x H07VR95 BATRETcables over every rack. Tighten the clamp with
20/10Nm. Do not strip the cable.

REMARK: The side of clamp connection 635rm can used for cable H07VR and H07VK.

Avoid repeated clamping at the same position of cable. Separate demaged cable clamps before they
will be reused.

Mark BATcables with marking tape L and according to cable placement list with designation strip
at every rack.

Mark BATRETcable at every rack with L+ and green/yellow tape.

Push caps on the end of cables.

Action A9

Make an EGintermeshing between all racks and suites in the room (except PRA).
1

Torxscrew

Connection to next PRA

Intermeshed electronic ground

Action A10
Following information of cabling list has to entered in the inner door label of PRA:
1

BATBranch A/B

rack row

rack position

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Enter the associated fuses of PRA resp. PDB in the TRUdescription label.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

84 / 246

8.1.1.1 Charging / Discharging Device for Capacitors

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Description of Charging Device

The charging device is not for continuous operations. You must not overstep the max. uptime of 10sec.
(destroy of charging device)
If LED is not going out during the time interval, maybe a short circuit of capacitor is given.
Max. test voltage: 66 V
LEDdisplay

crocodile clip
(isolated)

(4 mm)
banana plug

test pin

ca. 150 cm
cable length

Bild 30. Charging device for capacitors

See workflow

8.1.1.1

Action A1
Charging of TRU Capacitors
To avoid shortcircuit currents during connecting of the power cables BATA/BATB to branch line, the
TRU capacitors have to be charged with the specific charging device.

Clamp the crocodile clip of charging device to a voltagecarrying BAT link

Contact BATA/BATB connections with test pin of charging device to charge the TRU capacitors. The LED monitoring is going out after approx. 5sec. Then the charging is finished. (see
detail B)

Connect linking cables (BATA/BATB) to branch lines

Caution:

Capacitors are discharging themselves! Therefore the BATlinks have to be connected to the branch lines directly after charging of capacitors.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A2
Discharging of TRUCapacitors

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

85 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

In case of reduction or rearrangement of racks you have to avoid high discharging currents at the TRUcapacitors. Discharge the TRUcapacitors after disconnection of power linking cables (BATA/B) with the
specific discharging device.

Disconnect the linking cable (BATA/BATB) of TRU from branch lines.

Use the test pin from charging device to discharge the TRUcapacitors by contacting the connection plates BATA/B. When the LED is going out, the capacitor is discharged.

Disconnect BATRET linking cable of TRU from branch line.

8.1.1.2 SAFETY RULES FOR EXTENSION ON JFAMILY EXCHANGES

T103

Bild 31. Protection of the battery bar


Protection of the battery bar
See workflow

8.1.1.2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A1

To connect 2 adjacent Jracks in a suite, 4 bolts are required (M10L100).

To connect an endpanel on Jracks.

When this work should be carried out by the extension in an existing suite, the existing racks are
under tension.

The possibility exists to make short circuit during the mechanical connection of new racks to an existing rack in service.

To prevent this possibility, an insulation tool has been developed to protect the battery bar above the
circuit breakers during the connection activity (see fig. Bild 31. ).

This insulation tool is available at under code 8AB 60290 AAAA.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

86 / 246

For future projects this tool will be provided in the toolkit.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A2

In case of extension of a rack (cabling) remove the top rack cover. Pay attension to sharp egdes at
top rack cover and cable holder.

8.1.2 Grounding with conventional exchange


See workflow

8.1.2

Action A1

If a S12exchange and a conventional exchange are installed in the same room, you must lay a connecting cable 2 x H07VR95 black or 2 x H07VR95 green/yellow. Mark the black cable with tape
green/yellow.

connection at BATRET plate with cable lugs 95 mm2

connection of main power cable of conventional exchange with cable lugs or cable clamps (according
to options)

8.1.3 Power feeding BAT 1


See workflow

8.1.3

Action A1
Special application :

If only a single feeder to BAT1 (max. 500 A ) provided, fuses 1116 and 2328 are to be utilited. If,
in addition, fuses 1222 and 2934 are needed, a bridge from BAT1 to BAT2 of not less than 2 x 240
mm2 cross section have to be installed. Cut cable to required length, strip ends and install.
Observe required tightening torque 40Nm!

A
B

BAT Bridge top cabling

Bridge from BAT1 to BAT2

NYY0 1x240RM

Connections to filters

BAT bridge bottom cabling

8.2 Bottom Cabling


See workflow

8.2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Remark :
The power distribution racks for Jfamily JZ00A1 = 214 07504 AAAA and JZ10A1 = 214 07504 AABA
have been modified with PCS03 to become universal power distribution racks.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

87 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

That means that these racks are always produced in the factory in the same way, independent if they
should be used for topcabling or for bottomcabling. Additionally this rack can be used with power extension plates, for increased power cable section or copper bars, for top or bottom without any modification.
Important is that the BATRETplate is not mounted in the factory, but is ordered in the partslist of the ironwork and is to be mounted on site.
In the field the BATRETplate will be mounted in top of the rack for topcabling or in bottom of the rack
for bottomcabling.
Action A1

Remove rear cover of inner box

Mount the BATRET plate on the bottom of the rack rear side.

Mount the rearcover plate on the top of the rack.

Mount the covers on top of the rack.

Action A2

Mount the connection BATRETplate on the BATRETplate. See detail: A

Mount the BATconnection plates on the BATconnection bars BAT1 and BAT2. See detail: B

Action A3

Pull main power cable to specified position.

Mark the length.

Cut cable to the right length.

Remove cable sleeve with a knife, according the size of the clamp ( 4 cm). Leave some of the cable
sleeve ( 2 cm) at the cable end to prevent cable from splitting.

Open the clamp.

Put the cable into the clamp.

Tighten bolts with torque wrench (40 Nm).

Mark BATcables with marking tape L .

Mark BATRETcable with L+ and green/yellow tape.

REMARK: The power connection is optional with or without connection plates.

The plastic insulation covers and insulation block should be mounted after the connection of the main
power cable.

Action A4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Battery return (+) cable (95 mm2).

Measure distance distribution rack to end of suite (X+Y+Z). For uncomplete suites, also consider
the racks for future extension.

Cut to desired length. Battery () cable (25 mm2).

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

88 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Consult wiring diagram to find last rack where the cable has to run to. Measure this distance
(X1+Y+Z).

Here, too, allowances should be made for future extensions.

Action A5

Place the cable on top of the suite, at the front side of the racks. Cables running from suite to suite
should run through the cable channel under the raised floor (mind separation of signal and power
cables).

An insulation cap has to be placed at the end of the power cable with a hot air blower.

Power cables running down at the end of the suite should be tied with tie wraps to the supports, in
such a way that they do not interfere with the mounting of the side shielding.

Action A6

The two battery return cables (95 mm2) have to be conected together with one clamp per rack. Battery return cable of rack (35 mm2) have to be connected to one of the battery return cables of 95 mm2
by means of a cable clamp. All clamps have to be tightened with 20 Nm torque.

Mark BATRET with green/yellow tape at every rack.

The battery () cables have to be connected with clamps to the A or B feeding of the rack according
to the cable running list. All clamps have to be tightened with 10 Nm torque.

Action A7
Hexagon nut at the filter approx 2mm turn back.
Caution:

By the installation of the cables at the filter, the hold lock nut has to be held in
place with an openend wrench, so that no torque will be transmitted on the ceramic parts of the filter.

Tighten all connection at the filters with a torque wrench 8Nm.

The battery () cables have to be connected to the filters, according to the cable running list.

Action A8

The battery return (+) cables have to be connected to the battery return plate on the bottom of the
JZrack.

REMARK : The plastic insulation covers should be mounted after the connection of the main power cable.
Action A9
Every rack (except PRA) has to be connected to the ground at the bottom of the rack, in such a way that
an equipotential plane is created. Therefore opposite racks are interconnected.
1) Remove the cable sleeve with a cable knife.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2) Tighten the connection with torque 8Nm.


3) Lay the cable through the first cable clamp in each rack.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

89 / 246

Action A10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Following information of cabling list has to be written on the inner door label of the PRA for each fuse position used :
1

battery branch A/B

row

rack position

peripheral fuses

Action A11

Place the power cable separate in the cable supports on the front side.

Dont tie the power cables.

8.2.1 Exchange of faulty fuses in the TRU


See workflow

8.2.1

Action A1

Different manufactering of fuses.

Action A2
Caution:

Pull the plug connection 01 before exchange the fuses.

Exchange the AIRPAX fuse.

Action A3

Exchange the HEINEMANN fuse.

Action A4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Exchange the HEINEMANN fuse old version.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

90 / 246

8.3 Wall Panel and Filter Unit

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

8.3

Action A1

Connection points in power distribution box


material requirements
cable lug

max.

1.

BAT power feed L from rectifier/battery (Mainpower line)

13 120

120 mm2

2.

BATRET(FPE) power feed L+ from rectifier/battery (Main line)

13 120

120 mm2

3.

BATRET for suite 1 (branch distribution cable)

13 95

95 mm2

4.

BATRET for suite 2 or 2nd box (branch distribution cable)

13 95

95 mm2

5. BATA, BATB for rack (NH fuses 50 A) (branch distribution


cable)

8,4 16

16 mm2

Action A2
Mounting for top cabling

Mount suspension on wall.

Remove connection space from box (molded lid and end covers merely snap on and off profiled
bracket).

Hang box on wall and align using adjusting screws.

Mount both profiled brackets on wall. This requires pulling box off wall again to enable installation.

Suspension

Connection space

Profiled bracket

Action A3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Mounting for cabling from below

Turn connection rail BAT

Loose grounding cable from chassis and move connection rail BATRET to the lower position.

Move pull handle for NHfuses upwards.

Loose fixing nuts and move mounting plate out of box.

Mount carrier and positioning screws according to figure.

Attach box to the wall with cable entry from below.

Insert the mounting plate and connect grounding cable to box.

Remove grounding cable to the other side if changing the door from left to right or reverse.

Action A4

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

91 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Adapt lines to the box, cut with cable cutting and press on cable lugs.

Label BATLines with L and BATRETline with L+ and green/yellow.

Tighten all connections with torque wrench 40 Nm.

Install the cover after connection of BATlines.

Action A5

Allocate BATlines to the corresponding fuse elements, cut and strip the cable and press on, the
cable lugs.

Mark BATcables with marking tape L and according to cable placement list with designation strip
(cable connecting points on PDB).

Connect lines to the fuse elements

Connect lines on fuse elements with torque 1012Nm.

Action A6

Loose the screws and turn frame for connecting the circuit breaker.

Allocate lines to the corresponding circuit breakers and BATRET connection rail according to cable
placement list, cut and strip the cable and crimping fasten clips.

Insert lines according to cable placement list. (Circuit breaker 6A for MPA)

Hang on the frame and tighten the screws.

Connection points BAT

Connection bar BATRET

Connection points BATRET

BAT, BATRET for MPA H07 RNF 3 x 1,5

Circuit breaker 18 27

Fixing screws

Frame

Action A7

Guide and tension relieve of cable in cable support.

Installation of connection space

Cut or break out molded lid according to number of cables used and snap onto profiled brackets.

Slide end covers over sides.


1

Power Distribution Box

Cap, right

Cable holder

Molded lid

Cap ,left

Profile bracket

Cable channel

cable tie

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A8

ED

Adhesive labels shall be placed on inside and outside of door according to the illustration. Labels are
supplied with power distribution box.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

92 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

A8

Adhesive label see

Type plate 211 02864 AAAA

PCS label 211 02865 AAAA

Manufacturers plate 214 42774 AABA

Adhesive label 214 51392 AABA

Warning label 1AD 00789 0003

A
B

Labelling inside of door


Labelling outside of door

Action A9

The following information shall be obtained from exchange cabling list and entered on adhesive label
on inside of door of power distribution box.
1

Branch BAT (A)

Branch BAT (B)

Rack location

Action A10

Install the filter unit together with support on head frame.

Action A11
BAT and BATRETconnection lines are already mounted to the filter units. When refastening the connections, the hold lock nut A has to be held in place with an openend
wrench, so is no torque transmitted on the ceramic parts of the filter.

BATCable 10 mm2

Cable lug, 810

BATRETCable 35 mm2

Cable lug, 835

Hex. nut M8

When providing connection hold lock


nut with an openend wrench!

Washer 8,4

Action A12

Remove the installed connection lines BAT and BATRET at FPU. Connect BATA, BATB cables
(10mm2) and BATRET cables (35mm2) from filter unit to FPU.
Only if a filter unit have to be installed on every rack.

Action A13

There is a difference between the installation of single insulated power cable and double insulated
power cable.

Single insulated power cable have to be installed in a PVCcable channel. Reason for this is the danger of damaging the power cables.

Double insulated power cables can be installed without cable channel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Pay attention that no twisted pair and trunk cable crossover the power cables.

ED

The PVCcable channels shall be fixed on cable grid crossbars (3 locations per 2 m of channel) using
cable ties.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

93 / 246

Cover shall be ovcerlap the PVCchannel joint

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Possibilities to guide MDFCables

Action A14

Install cable clamp for rack branch BATRET H07VR35 over every rack and mark the cable with L+
and green/yellow tapes.

Additional install a cable clamp to make a parallel connection between 2 x H07VR95 BATRET
cables over every rack. Tighten the clamps with 20 Nm.
1
2

Cable clamps
3595/1695
BATA,BATB H07VR25

3
4

BATRET H07VR35
Clamp for parallel connection

Action A15

Press cable lugs on BATA, BATB and BATRETcables.

Mark BATcables with marking tape L and according to cable placement list with designation strip
(cable connecting points on PDB).

Mark BATRETcable with L+ and green/yellow tape.

Slip filter caps over BATcables .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tighten all connections to 8Nm using torque wrench. When connecting BATcables,
hold lock nuts on filter side with an openend wrench so that no torque is transmitted to
the ceramic parts of the filter.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

94 / 246

8.4 JRSU rack configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Example for rack configuration


10

12
2
BATB

BATB

JRSU

BATA

BATRET

1)

BATB

JRSU

JRSU

BATA

BATB
BATA

BATRET

RSU(H/DFamily

11

BATRET

BATA

JRSU

BATB
BATA

BATRET

feed.1

fedd.6

PDB
HZ01

BATRET

4
6

6
3

4*
4

Bild 32. Exchange feeding with power distribution box

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1) Length of BATRETbranch lines for

Filter

cable clamp
1695/635
cable clamp
3595/1695

max. equipment
feed. = Feeding BATA / BATB (branch)
max. connection points: 6 x 2 cables.

Conntact point at
MDFcable holder

BATRETpower feed (max. 2 x H07VR120)

BATpower feed (max. 2 x H07VR120)

BATbranch line (JRSU new installation


2xH07VR25)
BATRETlinking cable H07VR35 (branchTRU

BATRET (2 x H07VR95)
to next PDB resp. to conventional technic in the
same room in case of more then 3 JRSUracks

BATRETlinking cable H07VR35 (branchFilter)

BATRETlinking cable H07VR35 (TRUFilter)

BATRETbranch line (2 x H07VR95)

10

BATcable H07VR16 (Filter TRU)

4*

BATRETbranch line (2 x H07VR95)to next suite

11

BATlinking cable to 2. rack (H07VR16)

BATbranch line (H/DFamily; 2 x H07VR16/25) 12

ED

protecting caps

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

95 / 246

8.4.1 Power supply for two racks

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

8.4.1

Action A1

Exchange feeding with one filter unit for two racks.

Action A2

Ground the BATRET cable from extension rack without filter unit in MDFcable clamp.

Caution:

The power feeding of two racks with one filter unit is only possible with side by
side standing racks. In all other cases you have to install the filter unit in each
rack. Remove the BAT/BATRET cables between TRU and filter unit and replace
them with cables with the required cross section according workflow Action A1.

8.4.1.1 Explanation of JRSU connectivity list


Example: Extract of RSU specific connectivity list

S
LOCATION MNEMONIC E
Q
99E
99L
02 00A
05 04A
99F

JR03
HZ01Q1
HVT71
DS2VT
JR03

PART NUMBER

01
01
01
01
02

S
G
R

SPGW SI

DIRV SI

214 07509 AAAA


214 07451 AAAA

1
1

06

12

214 07509 AAAA

07

13

LOCATION

rack position

MNEMONIC

rack / distribution frame

SEQ =

PARTNUMBER

SGR / PDB

PDR / PDB

SPGW SI =

A Branch, BATA

Power con.
P

GREPL

ZW SI

numbering of rack / distribution frame


part number of rack / distribution frame

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

B Branch, BATB
P numbering of connected racks per fuse

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

96 / 246

8.5 Pressing of press cable lugs

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

8.5

Action A1

Preparation the hand press.

1) Unlock the hand lever and open the flap (Turn mark red of Rotary knob to mark yellow). To loose
the press components by screw driver is possible.

2)

Choose the right press component and insert them. Close the flap.

Action A2

1)

Turn the quick shutter forward until mark yellow shown to mark yelleow.

2)

Insert press cable lug and tighten it with quick shutter. Note for a correct cable lug position.

3) Insert cable into cable lug and press until press process is finished. Take out the cable by opnening of quick shutter.

Check on end of pressing: The embossment on press cable lug and press components is in accordance

REMARK : Interruption the press processes


If you see, a press process is getting wrong, then press the holding catch and turn the quick shutter to
open the flap.
Caution:

There are difference press components for pressing 16qmm and 25qmm see following
table.

Table of press components

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Cable cross
section

Press component
width

Number of
pressings

10qmm/70qmm K6 / K16

5mm/5mm

2/3

16qmm/35qmm K8 / K12

5mm/5mm

2/2

25qmm/50qmm K10 / K14

5mm/5mm

2/3

95qmm

K18

5mm

120qmm

K20

5mm

16qmm/35qmm K8 / K12

12mm/5mm

1/2

25qmm/50qmm K10 / K14

12mm/5mm

1/3

ED

Code
No.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

97 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ALCATEL

Cable runways

9
A1

Mark the holes

A2

Drill the holes

246

214 38390 AABA AS


9.4

Mounting top
cable structure (FACE)

9.3

Mounting cable
grid (ASEL)

9.2

Mounting cable
ducts

9.1

Mounting cable
racks

A3

Extension or
angle of 90

A2

Fixing to the wall

A1

Fixing to the ceiling

A1

Fixing to the ceiling

A2

Fixing to the wall

A3

Extension or
angle of 90

A4

Mount
CRK

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9 CABLE RUNWAY

Bild 33. Detailed workflow for cable runways

10

98 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Bild 34. detailled workflow for cable grid (ASEL)

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

99 / 246

JRSU
exchanges

9.3.1

9.3

Mounting
cable grid (ASEL)

Cut profil
rail

A1

Installation
profile rail
cable grid

A2

Cable grid
820mm

A2

A9

A10

A3

A4

A13

A11

Horizontal
cable grid

Horizontal
wall grid
A14

A7

Pilot

A8

A15

A16
Vertical grid within a row

Wall gap for


horizontal grid

Installation of rung
hooks for tubes

Vertical
cable grid
Fixing with dowel

rectangular connection
between profile rails

A6

Ceiling attachment
with pofile rail
A12

A5

connection between tubes

fish plate connection

Extension
300 mm cable grid
to
410 mm cable grid

Ceiling attachment

Ceiling attachment
with FZA anchor dowel

A1

Connection
single grid
profile rail
support

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Bild 35. detailled workflow for top cable structure (FACE, Cablofil)

Caution ! Take necessary safety precautions.

See workflow

See workflow

ED

ALCATEL
9

Action A1

Mark the holes according to the cable runway plan.

Action A2

Drill the holes using percussion drill and a vacuum cleaner to avoid dust entering the equipment.

9.1 Mounting of cable racks (CRK)

9.1

Action A1

10

214 38390 AABA AS

246

100 / 246

A6

A5
A4

A3

Parts for fixing


on wall

Parts of hanging
on the ceiling

A2

Bend a bow

A3

covers

A1

9.5

Install
top structure

A2

profile connections

T
connection

install
supports

A1

install
supports

CABLOFIL

9.4

Mounting top
cable structure

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Fixing the hanging cable runway to ceiling.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A2

Fixing runway on wall.

Action A3

Fixing possibilities to extend and to make an angle of 90o with a cable ladder.

Action A4

Mounting of the cable rack

9.2 Mounting of cable ducts


See workflow

9.2

Action A1

Mounting the cable duct to the ceiling.

Action A2

Mounting possibility to fix a cable duct to the wall.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A3

Fixing possibilities to extend and to make a curb of 90o with a cable duct.

Mount cable duct.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

101 / 246

9.3 Optional cable grid (SEL)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

9.3

Caution ! Take necessary safety precautions.

A1

Connection: cable grid, profile rail, grid support

A2

Installation profile rail for illumination

A4

Fish plate

A5

Tube joint

A6

Connection between profile rails

A7

Guide pin

A9

A10 A11

Ceiling attachment

A15

Wall gap for cable grid

Example: grid to MDF

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

 Wall and ceiling gaps must be closed with fire protective covers (according to the customers requirements)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

102 / 246

Standard lengths of tubes and profile rails

Number of rack in row

1
1

852

852

Installation sequence per row

976

900

976

890

852

1800

976

1790

852

2700

976

2690

852

3600

976

3590

852

3600

900

976

3590

890

852

3600

1800

976

3590

1790

852

3600

2700

976

3590

2690

852

3600

3600

976

3590

3590

10

852

3600

3600

900

10

976

3590

3590

890

11

852

3600

3600

1800

11

976

3590

3590

1790

12

852

3600

3600

2700

12

976

3590

3590

2690

13

852

3600

3600

3600

13

976

3590

3590

3590

14

852

3600

3600

3600

900

14

976

3590

3590

3590

890

15

852

3600

3600

3600

1800

15

976

3590

3590

3590

1790

16

852

3600

3600

3600

2700

16

976

3590

3590

3590

2690

Number of rack in row

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Installation sequence per row

L = row length

Standard profile rails


1AD 00702 0003
0004
0005
0006
0007

852 mm
900 mm
1800 mm
2700 mm
3600 mm

Standard tubes
1AD 03595 0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006

976 mm
890 mm
1790 mm
2690 mm
1572 mm
3590 mm

L
ca. 40 mm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

row front side

ca. 40 mm

row

Action A1

ED

Fix profile rail to grid support.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

103 / 246

Attach aluminium tubes to rail using clamps (see detail). Use rung for keeping correct distance between tubes.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A1*

Lock contact springs at support. Resilience upwards!

Action A2
Positioning of cable grid in the 1st suite of Jracks

Cut profiled rail (delivered length 1480mm) to required length 1254 mm.

Fix profiled rail 1

Positioning of cable grid according to measures.

on grid support.

Action A3

A
B
C

Positioning of cable grid in a new Jrack suite except 1st Jrack suite (profile rail 900 mm)
Positioning of cable grid if extension of Hracks with Jracks from 2nd suite (profile rail 906 mm)
Positioning of cable grid if extension of Hracks with Jracks in the 1st suite (cut profile rail length : 1254 mm)

Action A4
fishplate connecction
Action A5
connection between tubes

Tconnection

tubeextension

Action A6
rectangular connection between profiled rails
Action A7
Install pilot.
Action A8

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Cable grid between suites

Measure of required length of tube between suites and cut it down.

Plug hooks in tubes, adjust them between the tubes and mark correct alignment.

Fix hook in correct position in tube using the wedge.

Action A9
Ceiling attachment with FZA anchor dowel

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

104 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The FZA anchor bore hole is drilled with dust extraction device into the rotary hammer drill.

Bore hole diameter, undercutting and bore hole depth are all to exact anchor requirement.

The correct installation is ensured when the anchor sleeve is hammered home flush with the concrete.

Using the machine with hammeraction engaged dril at right angle to the concrete until the integral

depth stop reaches the surface.


2

To form the undercut hole swivel machine in a circular motion and press hammerdrill firmly against

concrete (12 rotations up to drill 14mm and 35 rotations for drill 18 and 22mm)
3

Place anchor in setting tool, push into drilled hole and drive the anchor sleeve over the end of conical

bolt until the sleeve fits flush with the concrete surface.
4

Correct anchor postion in concrete ceiling, anchor sleeve fits flush with concrete surface.

Action A10

Ceiling attachment with to profiled rail if it exists on the ceiling.The supervision of construction have
to release all fixing points at the ceiling.

Action A11

Ceiling attachment with profiled rail

N.B.


If the distance between anchoring rail is more than 1250mm an additional rail has to be installed
between. Therefore the allowance of the responsible office is necessary.
Insert adapter sleeve in all tube connections!

Action A12

Fix tube with thread hook to bracket. Place vertical tube.

Drill hole ( 4 mm) for adapter sleeve, use sleeve to fix the bracket.

Install rungs (use gauge for correct distance).

Action A13

Mearsure and drill the dowel holes. Screw console to the wall with FZAanchor dowel.

Install horizontal tubes and fix them with thread hooks.

Install rungs.
Install horizontal wall grid on solid walls only!

Action A14

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fixing on the wall with dowel


1

Specification the length of the screws.

Length of dowel + thickness of the piece to fixed = length of the screw.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

105 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Anchoring depth of dowel in the wall. Dowel spread direction vertical to the wall.

Distance the holes.

Measure and drill the holes, install brackets.

Install profile rail.

Install horizontal tubes (rungs)

Use curved cable guiding plates only for long vertical grids!
An electrical connection between interrupted (separated) grids have to be made using
2x H07VR35 gn/yel (FPE). >see Action A15
Action A15

Measure and drill the holes, install brackets.

Install profile rail.

Fix the horizontal tubes on profile rail.

Fix the electrical connection on profil rail separat.

Action A16

Cut profile rail to correct length and fix it on grid and floor using the brackets.
If needed, use :
or

754 mm tube

1AD 00696 0010

344 mm tube

1AD 00696 0011

Distance to compensate uneven floor

9.3.1 JRSU exchanges


See workflow

9.3.1

Action A1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Caution:

Only for JRSU exchanges with one suite of racks with 820mm cable grid

Cut profile rail to the length of 1254 mm.

Install cable grid in the middle of grid support.

Install grid supports with part number 3BJ 00149 AAAA in case of 820mm cable grid
See Chapter 9.3 action 1*.

Action A2
Caution:

ED

Only for JRSU exchanges with more then one suite of racks with 820mm cable
grid

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

106 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Cut profile rail for the first row to the length of 1254 mm, for the following rows to the length of 1214
mm.

Place and install the cable grid according to the drawing. Avoid onesided load of cable grid!

Install grid supports with part number 3BJ 00149 AAAA in case of 820mm cable grid
See chapter 9.3 action 1*.

9.4 Optional top cable structure (FACE)


See workflow

9.4

Action A1

Install the support to the racks.

Action A2

Install the top cable structure on the supports along the row.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A3

extension of profiles

Tconnection of profiles

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

107 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Bild 36. Row configuration from1 to 6 racks

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

108 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Bild 37. Row configuration from 7 to 10 racks

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

109 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

9.5 Cable duct CABLOFIL

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

General
The cable duct CABLOFIL is a new variant of cable duct. The material for installation will be delivered by
CABLOFIL. Except the pieces of support 1 and the ceiling hanging piece 2 . Alcatel will use 2 different
cable ducts:
1) Measure 100mm wide and 54mm high
2) Special measure 500mm wide and 150mm high
The cable duct CABLOFIL can be installed in possible variants:
Cable duct with Tconnection
Vertical installation on the wall
Horizontal installation on the wall
Horizontal on top of the rack with special support and profile rails
Hanging on the ceiling
Installation in a bow
More variants are described in Cablofile catalogue
See workflow

9.5

Action A1
Example of cable duct 500mm wide and 150mm high.

Install the support 1 on top of the rack.

Mount the profile rail CSN at the support and fix them with the screws.

The cable duct is fixed on the profil rail by pushing the rail noses downwards.

For earthquake protection use the rail CS. The rail will be delivered of length 1000mm, cut the rail
in 2 pieces of 500mm.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A2

For cable duct hanging on the ceiling use the ceiling hanging piece 2 and threaded rod.

For extension of threaded rod use the nipple (if required).

Use a nut and washer at both sides of the nipple to secure the fixing.

Cut the profile rail of length 600mm and fix them under the duct on the threaded rods.

For hanging the cable duct (100mm) on the ceiling use the SAS system.

Coupling of cable ducts

ED

For coupling the cable ducts use coupling plates.


10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

110 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Install on duct 500mm wide on each side 1 and at the bottom 2 coupling plates (total 4).

Install on duct 100mm wide on each side 1 and at the bottom 1 coupling plates (total 3).

Remark
The tool for installing the coupling plates will be delivered by each order from Cablofil without specifying
it in the ordering list. For this reason the tool will have no Alcatel number.
Action A3

Cut with cutting tool the required parts out and bend the cable grid to a bow.

For fixing a cable duct bow on internal radius use the coupling kits.

Action A4

To make a Tconnection use the connection piece ED250/90 and screw the both cable ducts together with the fixing kit.

Before fixing the cable trays, cut out the steel wire at one side.

Look the picture how to cut a cable tray.

Remark:
The Cablofil cable duct is shaped on site to the exact measurements by simply cutting the steel wire.
For cutting of cable ducts use always cutting tool 1AD 02414 0011.
The choise and positioning of the jaws will allowan angled cut as close as possible to the intersection
of the steel wires. This method is important to ensure the best possible finish.
The use of bolt cutters ensures the maintenance of a protective over the cut and helps create a galvanic couple to protect it.
Action A5

The cable duct covers will be used only in case of vertical installation of a cable duct.

For fixing use the cover clip.

Action A6

The cable duct installation of 100mm along a wall is done with the bracket profile.

The bracket will be fixed on the wall with a dowel and a wood screw 8 x 50.

The cable duct is fixed on the bracket profile by pushing the noses downwards.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A6*

The cable duct installation of 500mm along a wall is done with a double structure bracket.

The double bracket will be fixed to the wall with a expansion bolt M12 x 75.

Fix the cable duct on the double bracketwith the pieces of long spring nut, washer and bolt.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

111 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Vertically installation of cable duct

For vertically installation of cable duct 500mm on the wall use the part of profile rail CSN500 (see
Action A1).

The profile rail will be fixed on the wall with dowels and wood screws 8 x 50.

For vertical installation of cable duct 100mm on the wall use the part of profile rail CSN150.

The profile rail will be fixed on the wall with dowels and wood screws 8 x 50.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

112 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

10

ALCATEL

10.2

BOTTOM CABLING

214 38390 AABA AS

246
10.2.2

Cables to remote
equipment

10.2.1

Intercabling

10.1.2.3

Cables
remote
equipment

A.2

Sawing the
holes
A.2

MPA
power
cabling
A.1

Tying
the
cables

A.2

Mark and
strip cables

A.1

A.1

Placing
cable
form

A.1

MPA
power
cabling

10.1.2.2

Inside cable

A.2

A.4*

Plug on
rack alarm
cables

A.4

place the
cables in
the rack

A.3

A.3

A.4

A.5

Plug on
the cable

A.4

A.5

A.6

Plug on
the cables

A.6

Power
AC 230V

Rack alarm
cables

A.5

Connector
position

Cable in
channels

A.4

Tying the
cables in
the rack

Plug on

A.3

Pulling and
marking the Stripping
MPA + periph. the
cables
cables

A.3

Plug on
the
cables

A.3

Ground
cables

A.2

Unpacking
Placing cable Position in
cable holder
form

A.1

Cable
overlength

A.6

EGconnection

10.1

TOP CABLING

10.1.2.1

10.1.2

Remov
transport locks

Cable form

Single cables

Intercabling

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

10 INTER CABLING

Bild 38. Detailed workflow for exchange cabling

10

113 /

10.1 Top cabling

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

10.1.1 Rules of cable guides


General
a)

Explanation of cable numbers

STANDARD INTRA RACK signal and power cables


Specified by CDE per preequipped rack and listed in the JG, JC, and RC document
0 . . . .

or 4 . . . .
SEQUENCE NUMBER FROM 01..99, A0..A9, B0..B9,..., AA..AZ, BA..BZ...
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING

0 .

.
A

LINE, TRUNKS, ETC. TO DAP

TI TO ACCESS SWITCH ( AND MULTIPLE )

AS TO GS STAGE 1

GS1 TO GS1 (FOLDED BACK NETWORK)

GROUP SW STAGE 1/2

CONNECTIONS IN CONCENTRATOR RACKS

RTMA CONNECTIONS

PLANES 0, 1, 2, 3

H
TO PTB, LPF, TMIA OR SERVICE PANEL (RSU AND
BSC)
J
CLOCK AND TONE
K

ALARMS

PERIPHERALS + CABLE FORM (RSU)

MISCELLANEOUS

CONNECTIONS IN BSC RACKS

POWER < BAT AND BATRET >

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Q POWER < SG >, AND INTERCONN. TO S/R FRAME


R
POWER < EG >, AND BRIDGE INTERCONNECTIONS
BETWEEN < EG > AND < BATRET > OR < SG >

ED

POWER < +5V >

POWER < 5V >

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

114 /

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

POWER < +12V >

POWER < 12V >

W
>
X

POWER < +48V > OR < 93V (TOGETHER WITH 93VRET)> OR < 60V

POWER < VRET > OR < +15VRET > OR < 93VRET >

2Z

CONNECTIONS IN DXC RACKS (DIGITAL CROSS CONNECT)

POWER < V > OR < +15V > OR AC

Bild 39. Standard intra rack cabling


Exchange dependent cables
Specified by CAE and listed in the JG document
. . . . . . . .

SEQUENCE NUMBER FROM 01..99, A0..A9, B0..B9,..., AA..AZ, BA..BZ...


RACK POSITION OF THE REFERENCE RACK
SUITE NUMBER OF THE REFERENCE RACK
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING

1 OR 5

(5 in case of first character is :)


INTRARACK SIGNAL AND POWER CABLES

2 OR 6

(6 in case of first character is :)


INTERRACK SIGNAL CABLES AND POWER CABLES
BETWEEN PERIPHERALS

3 OR 7

INTERRACK POWER CABLES MAIN DISTRIBUTION

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NOTE : The rack location (suiterack position) in the cable number is the location of the rack which contains the underscored items on next pages.(side with flag*)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

115 /

. . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 or 2
A

LINES, TRUNKS, ETC zum MDF, DAF, DDF, DOP oder


ANNOUCEMENT MACHINES

TI ( CPM + CTM ) zu AS oder AS zu AS

C
3.
D

AS zu GS STAGE 1 PLANES 0, 1, 2,

GROUP SW ST1 zu GROUP SW ST2

PCM LINK (CROSSOVER)

GS STAGE2 zu GS STAGE3.

TO PTB (RSU)

CLOCK und TONE.

ALARMS

PERIPHERALS

MISCELLANEOUS

N
2
P
3

CROSS LINKS ON STAGE

TI zu AS

CROSS LINKS ON STAGE

INTRA POWER

DAF, DDF oder DMDF oder ACP zu anderen Systemen

TAU LOOP

OPM CONNECTIONS

2 oder 4 WIRES TRUNKS zu LINKING TERMINAL

AS zu RTMA

RTMA zu GS oder RTMA zu RTMA

RESERVE

XZ RESERVE
Bild 40. exchange dependent signal cables

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

116 /

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3 . . .

. .

. .
A

BAT AND BATRET

SAFETY GROUND

ELECTRONIC GROUND

SURGE GROUND

MISCELLANEOUS

F/Y RESERVE
Bild 41. exchange dependent power cables
b)

Explanation cable placement list


CABLE PLACEMENT LIST
from

cable
cable
number part number
5LB01D01 214 08194 AAGA

to

CON STE cable


CHN RUN CON STE cable
CHN
RK termination
RK termination
A

01D

04::45BA12

01E

03::41BA12

cable number: 6 characters (CDECable)


8 characters (CAEcable)

TCDB
BCD

01D

04::13BA12

01E

03::09BA12

cable part number

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

214 08194 AAGA

0m

0m

0,0 m

10 m

1m

0,1 m

20 m

2m

0,2 m

30 m

3m

0,3 m

40 m

4m

0,4 m

50 m

5m

0,5 m

60 m

6m

0,6 m

70 m

7m

0,7 m

80 m

8m

0,8 m

90 m

9m

0,9 m

example: code AAGA  0,6 m

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

117 /

Connector (CON): 1 character

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

A = plug
B = plug
C = plug

e.g. flat cables

= without plug (e.g. MDFcable, MDF side)

STE(suite)
RK (rack) : 3 characters
rack

STE
02
suite number 01, 02....
rack position A,B ...
01
A

E
rack

Cable termination: 10 characters

rear view

01
02

04::06AA04

z. B. Kabelanschaltepunkt:

03

04

A
B

04

subrack
connector header
segment
connecting position

05
06
07

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

08

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

118 /

Cable channel (CHN) : 1 character

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

CHN

right channel

CHN

left channel

3 or D

direct

to next rack

4 or C

curtain

right

5 or C

curtain

left

6 or D

direct right or left to next rack

3
2

rear view

direct

curtain

run:
TCDB
CG
TCT

TCD

CG

cable grid

TCT

top cable tray

TCD

top cable duct

TCDB
BCT
BCT

RF

top cable duct top cable duct B


bottom cable tray
raised floor

RF

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

rear view

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

119 /

rack location

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

02D

locking latch
rack rear view

10

back panel

connector header
subrack

clip for counting


Description

01
subrack
subrack 02 04
subrack
05
subrack 06 08

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

connector header
locking latch
clip for counting

ED

=
=
=
=

top rack unit


subracks
air buffle
subracks

premounted in factory

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

120 /

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

horizontal
direction

subrack 4

01
08
33
01
segment A

vertical
directon

33
faston tap

segment B

power linking terminal

Description

Example:

cable placement location

01H 4 20A 08

rack position
4th subrack starting from the top
20th position in horizontal direction
segment upper half of subrack (countable
in accordance of connector header)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

8th position in vertical direction

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

121 /

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

horizontal
direction

subrack 4

vertical
direction

segment A
04
segment B

marking every 5
position

connector header
27

counting

Here: locking latch into position 26

Description
Example:

locking latch into position 26

02D 4 04 A 27

rack position
4th subrack starting from top
4th position in horizontal direction
segment upper half of subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

27th position in the connector haeder

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

122 /

10.1.2 Intercabling

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

10.1.2.1 Single cables


See workflow

10.1.2.1

Action A1

Remove the transport locks (cable ties).

Action A2

Before connecting the plug-in cables, bend the cables directly at the connector. The same have to
be done for cabling from vertical in horizontal direction. Connect the cables in their specific positions
and feed them to the left or right cable clips.

Cable inside the rack row have to be laid in cable holder above and below at the bottom plate.

Screw in a pilot for guiding the cables at the bottom on the rear side of the rack. Not used for 1st rack
of suite, F rack and PRA. (See chapter 7.2 too).

Action A3

Overlength have to be laid in a loop in the vertical cable runway.

Fix the cable with tie on the vertical EG bar.

Action A4

Cables between suites have to be run in screened cable channels. Cables running downwards in a
rack on left and right side. Push a PVCprofile between the cable clip fingers to guide the vertical
cables.

Action A5

Connect the cables in their right positions according to labels of cabling list. Each connector position
has a locking latch. The connector must lock exactly into position. If racks are standing side by side,
two power cables are connected on every SR position (2 8) to the grounding bar to the adjacent
rack.

Action A6

Install 14 EGcables between two rack.

10.1.2.2 Cable form


See workflow

10.1.2.2

Action A1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

After unpacking the cable form, arrange the cables as close as possible to the racks. Look at the
labels to which suite the form has to be allocated. Put the cables on the hooks at the back side of
the racks. Check labels for correspondence with the racks. Position the cable in the rack. Cables
running from suite to suite must follow the cable ducts between the suites.

Action A2

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

123 /

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Cables running horizontally through the rack have to be positioned in the cable holders. If the cable
space of the cable holder is full, add other fingers to create second cable space. Push finger against
the cables. Cables running at the begin/end of the suites should be tied with tiewraps.

Action A3

Plug on cables. Consult labels and cabling list for proper position.

Action A4

Cables for rack alarms. A full J-rack configuration may not have the back panel for rack alarms.

Action A6

Install 14 EGcables between two rack.

10.1.2.3 Remote equipment (Feeding of alarm panel to distribution rack)


See workflow

10.1.2.3

Action A1
Power supply cables DC 48 V/60 V and system cables have to be guided separately from 230 V power
supply cables.

Bundle the cable on the grid and tie up at approx. every 2nd 3rd rung with twin.

At the wall the cables are guided in channels.

Action A2

Lead the cable in the cable channel, mark the cable and strip them with soldering iron with cutting
part to a length of 30mm. (Not the cable NYM 3 x 1,5). Take care not to damage screen or wires.

Strip the power supply cable and crimp the faston clips at the conductors.

Action A3

Connect the cable at grounding plate with cable clamps. Adjust with torque wrench 80 Ncm. The
cable clamp is for grounding of cables not for pullrelief.

Action A4

Place the power supply cables to PDR.

Strip the power supply cable on power rack side and crimp the faston clips at the conductors.

Plug on the cable of circuit breaker.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A5

Place the alarm cables (Consult labels and cabling list for appropriate position). Position the cables
in the S12 rack. Make a marking at the place where the cable enters the Jrack.

Peripheral cables going up in the rack should be tied with tie wraps.

Action A6
Power supply AC 230V for peripherie equipments.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

124 /

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Connect the wires :

blue

black

L1

green/yellow

(PE) at the clamps

Insert a cable bridge between the apparatus sockets. The free space in the cable channel is used
to receive a phone socket.

10.2 Bottom cabling


10.2.1 Intercabling
See workflow

10.2.1

Action A1
After unpacking the cable form, arrange the cables as close as possible to the racks. Consult the labels
to see which suite the form has to be allocated to.
Put the cables on the hooks at the rear side of the racks. Check labels for correspondence with the racks.
Position the cable in the rack. Cables running from suite to suite have to be installed, via the suite ends,
through the cable channels under the raised floor, to the next rack. Mind separation of power and signal
cables.
Action 2
Cables running vertically through the rack have to be tied together with tie wraps. Cables running horizontally through the rack have to be positioned in the cable holders.
If the cable space of the cable holder is full, add other fingers to create a second cable space. Push finger
against the cables. Cables running at the beginning/end of the suites should be tied with tie wraps.
Action A3
Plug on cables. Consult labels and cabling list for appropriate position. Each connector position has a
locking latch. The connector must lock exactly into position.
Action A4
Plug on the rack alarm cables as per cable list if rack alarm is provided.
REMARK : Note that a full J-rack configuration may not have the BPA for rack alarms.
10.2.2 Remote equipment
See workflow

10.2.2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A1
Power supply cables DC 48 V/60 V and system cables have to be guided separately from 230 V power
supply cables.

ED

Place the cables (Consult labels and cabling list for appropriate position).
10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

125 /

At the wall the cables are guided in channels.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A2

For lead of the peripheral cables make holes in the floor with clock saw or with jig saw.

Action A3

Mark the cable for grounding and strip them with soldering iron with cutting part to a length of 30mm.
(Not the cable NYM 3 x 1,5). Take care not to damage screen or wires.

Action A4

Put the cable in/outlet in place. Make sure there is a good contact between cable screen and S12
rack. Empty in/outlets should be filled with dummy cables.

Peripheral cables going up in the rack should be tied with tie wraps.

Action A5

Position the cables in the S12 rack. Make a marking at the place where the cable enters the J-rack.

Plug on the cables (Consult labels and cabling list for appropriate position).

Action A6

Mount the grounding plate from above to below

Connect the cable at grounding plate with cable clamps. Adjust with torque wrench 80 n/cm. Strip
the power supply cable and crimp the faston clips at the conductors. The cable clamp is for grounding
not for pullrelief.

Plug on the cables (Consult labels and cabling list for appropriate position).

10.3 Cabling external clocksynchronization


If the number of links, the direction and the type of signalisation, to be used for the external clocksynchronization, are not known at the moment of working out the CAEcabling, then the cabling documents will
be edited as follows.
Four cables will be provided for clock A and four cables for clock B.
These cables are : 2JG...01 and 2JH...01
2JG...02
2JH...02
2JG...03
2JH...03
2JG...04
2JH...04
The rack location of the cable termination on the side of the Frack will be determined. The other termination (side of the DTM) will not be determined.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The responsible for the field operations will contact the customer to be informed about the DTMs to be
used. The following cabling documents will be completed manually on the site :

Cabling list

Cable placement

Cable connection list

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

126 /

Cable labels

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The cables will be ordered by CAE engineer together with the other CAE cables.
These cables will not be included in the exchange cable form.
The cabling documents are to be completed at the location indicated with *.

CABLE
NUMBER

C FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
O
LENGTH N

RACK
LOCATION

2JG01A01 211 03156


02P

CAAA
20.0

A EF00B2
A EXTCLK

EXCLKARCCAA
DTM

AA 01A
**
***

07::16BA08
********

2JG01A02 211 03156


02P

CAAA
20.0

A EF00B2
A EXTCLK

EXCLKARCCAA
DTM

AA 01A
**
***

07::16BA14
********

2JG01A03 211 03156


02P

CAAA
20.0

A EF00B2
A EXTCLK

EXCLKARCCAA
DTM

AA 01A
**
***

07::16BA20
********

2JG01A04 211 03156


02P

CAAA
20.0

A EF00B2
A EXTCLK

EXCLKARCCAA
DTM

AA 01A
**
***

07::16BA26
********

2JH01A01 211 03156


02P

CAAA
20.0

A EF00B2
A EXTCLK

EXCLKBRCCAB
DTM

AA 01A
**
***

07::48BA08
********

2JH01A02 211 03156


02P

CAAA
20.0

A EF00B2
A EXTCLK

EXCLKBRCCAB
DTM

AA 01A
**
***

07::48BA14
********

2JH01A03 211 03156


02P

CAAA
20.0

A EF00B2
A EXTCLK

EXCLKBRCCAB
DTM

AA 01A
**
***

07::48BA20
********

2JH01A04 211 03156


02P

CAAA
20.0

A EF00B2
A EXTCLK

EXCLKBRCCAB
DTM

AA 01A
**
***

07::48BA26
********

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Cabling list
CABLE PART NR
CAP

Cable placement list

CABLE
NUMBER

CABLE PART
NUMBER

2JG01A01
2JG01A02
2JG01A03
2JG01A04

211 03156 CAA


211 03156 CAA
211 03156 CAA
211 03156 CAA

A
A
A
A

01A
01A
01A
01A

2JH01A01
2JH01A02
2JH01A03
2JH01A04

211 03156 CAA


211 03156 CAA
211 03156 CAA
211 03156 CAA

A
A
A
A

01A
01A
01A
01A

ED

CABLE
TERMI
TERMINAT.

C STE
O RK
N

CABLE
TERMINAT.

C RUN
H
N

C STE
O RK
N

CABLE
TERMINAT.

C
H S
N T

07::16BA08
07::16BA14
07::16BA20
07::16BA26

1
1
1
1

BCD
BCD
BCD
BCD

A
A
A
A

***
***
***
***

**********
**********
**********
**********

1
1
1
1

+
+
+
+

07::48BA08
07::48BA14
07::48BA20
07::48BA26

2
2
2
2

BCD
BCD
BCD
BCD

A
A
A
A

***
***
***
***

**********
**********
**********
**********

2
2
2
2

+
+
+
+

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

127 /

Cable connection list

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

RACK LOCATION

: ** ***

RACK MNEMONIC :
EXTCLK

CABLE
TERMINAT.

CABLE
NUMBER

C
O
N

**********
**********
**********
**********

2JG01A01
2JG01A02
2JG01A03
2JG01A04

A
A
A
A

**********
**********
**********
**********

2JH01A01
2JH01A02
2JH01A03
2JH01A04

A
A
A
A

CABLE
TERMINAT.

CABLE
NUMBER

C
O
N

CABLE
TERMINAT.

CABLE
NUMBER

C
O
N

Cable labels

AA 01A
211 03156

1 07::16BA08
CAAA 2JG01A01

** ***
211 03156

1 **********
CAAA 2JG01A01

2JG
01A01

2JG
01A01

AA 01A
211 03156

1 07::16BA014
CAAA 2JG01A02

** ***
211 03156

1 **********
CAAA 2JG01A02

2JG
01A02

2JG
01A02

AA 01A
211 03156

1 07::16BA20
CAAA 2JG01A03

** ***
211 03156

1 **********
CAAA 2JG01A03

2JG
01A03

2JG
01A03

AA 01A
211 03156

1 07::16BA26
CAAA 2JG01A04

** ***
211 03156

1 **********
CAAA 2JG01A04

2JG
01A04

2JG
01A04

AA 01A
211 03156

2 07::48BA08
CAAA 2JH01A01

** ***
211 03156

1 **********
CAAA 2JH01A01

2JH
01A01

2JH
01A01

AA 01A
211 03156

2 07::48BA14
CAAA 2JH01A02

** ***
211 03156

1 **********
CAAA 2JH01A02

2JH
01A02

2JH
01A02

AA 01A
211 03156

2 07::48BA20
CAAA 2JH01A03

** ***
211 03156

1 **********
CAAA 2JH01A03

2JH
01A03

2JH
01A03

AA 01A
211 03156

2 07::48BA26
CAAA 2JH01A04

** ***
211 03156

1 **********
CAAA 2JH01A04

2JH
01A04

2JH
01A04

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

128 /

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

10

A2

Cable way
to MDF
MDF/DDF
cabling

246

214 38390 AABA AS

Bild 42. Detailed workflow MDF cabling

11

Different
MDFs

11.2.2

A1

A2

Sort the
cables

A1

A2

Place
wires

A4

Jumper
wiring

A5

A6

LSAPlus
strip 8xa,b,s

DDF
cabling
A1

129 / 246

120 Ohm
cabling and
jumbering

A3

A2

connect
120 Ohm
cable

Wrap
frame
11.4.2

A1
prepare
120 Ohm
cable

A2

Coax
cable
11.4.2

A7
Vertical
installation

Push the
terminals

Mount
connection
block

A7

Insert the
conductors

Place
wires
A3

A6

Insertion
tool

Complete
distributor

11.4.1

A5

Occupation
the bays

MDF
LSAPlus
11.3

A4

Connect the
cable screen

Connect the
cable screen

Connection
block 95Q

11.2

A3

Check
cable

A1
Install
75 Ohm
cable plug

11 MDF/DDF CABLING / MDF CONNECTIONS.

ED
ALCATEL

A1

11.2.1

Mount
connection
block

Sort the
cables

Connection
block 71

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Wrapping
on DDF
11.4.2

Wrap frame
A1

A2

Prepare
120 Ohm
cable

11.4.3

A1
75 Ohm
cable

11.1 General information


The MDF/DDF installation and cabling procedure depends on the delivered MDF/DDF system.
Please consult the supplier installation and cabling procedures.

MDF blocks 100 pairs example (splitting MDF cable)

MDF in S12 practice

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The MDF is the interface between the exchange and the line (subscriber) side. Jumper wires link line side
with exchange side. Overvoltage protectors can be added if required.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

130 / 246

Line Side

MDFRACK

Exchange Side

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Overvoltage Protector

Exchange
Cable

Subscriber (Line)
Cable

Jumper Wire
Disconnection used for
testing subscriber line

Disconnection used for testing


exchange line or connecting
special services

MEASUREMENT OF EARTH SYSTEM RESISTANCE


MDF
16 mm2
SWITCH 100 A

DC AMMETER 100 A

GROUND CONDUCTOR
+

VARIABLE RESISTOR
0,6 FOR 6V
1,2 FOR 12V
(LAMPS PARALLEL)

+
DC VOLT METER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

GROUND COLLECTOR

ED

CAR BATTERY

6V OR 12V 100 Ah

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

131 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

LINE PROTECTORS

OUTSIDE
PLANT

2 TWOELECTRODE
GASARRESTOR

LINE CIRCUIT

OR

OUTSIDE
PLANT

OUTSIDE
PLANT

1 THREEELECTRODE
GASARRESTOR

LINE CIRCUIT

LINE CIRCUIT

2 TWOELECTRODE
GASARRESTOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

HEAT SENSOR CONTACT CLOSES WHEN SOLDER PELLET MELTS

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

132 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

MDF blocks 128 pairs example.

lines are counted from bottom to top

all cables contain 64 pairs

two cables per MDF block

Rules for MDF cable connection

at MDF side the cables have to be distributed and fixed to the MDF frame in accordance with
the suppliers MDF procedure

the position and the numbering sequence for the lines on the MDF frame have to be specified
by the customer e.g. counting from bottom to top or top to bottom counting from left to right or
vice versa

the cabling list gives the sequence of the cables; the connectivity list gives the relation between
modules (ASM) and line numbering (LIC numbering)

the LIC number is the directory number

for mixed modules (MSM) the analog and the ISDN lines have to be separated on the MDF side.
The customer will specify the position on the MDF

the cable label at MDF side will give following information :


MDF location

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Cable number

ED

LIC numbers
Cable sequence number

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

133 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

11.1.1 Example for connection to MDF

15

60 lp

16

40 fp

13

32 lp

14

64 p

15

4 fp

11

4 lp

12

64 p

13

32 fp

10

40 lp

11

40 fp

12 lp

10

24 fp

48 lp

52 fp

20 lp

16 fp

56 lp

44 fp

28 lp

8 fp

10

64 p

36 fp

64
pairs

64 p

64 p

36 first
pairs of
second cable

16
24 pair
reserve

28 last
pairs of
second cable

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

64 first lines of the first rack

Remark: In the above example counting is from bottom to top.


The split cables have to be covered with crimp sleeve.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

134 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ED

MDF blocks 128 pairs example.

lines are counted from bottom to top

all cables contain 64 pairs

two cables per MDF block

15

16

13

14

11

12

10

64P

64P

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

135 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

11.1.2 Colour code for 128 pair system cable


ITM

Bundle

01

WH

ITM

Bundle

WH

33

WH

02

BL

34

BL

03

WH

35

WH

04

YE

36

YE

05

WH

37

WH

06

BN

38

BN

07

WH

39

WH

08

BK

40

BK

09

WH

41

WH

10

GN

42

GN

11

WH

43

WH

12

OR

44

OR

13

WH

45

WH

14

GY

46

GY

15

WH

47

WH

16

VI

48

VI

WH

49

18

BL

50

BL

19

WH

51

WH

20

YE

52

YE

21

WH

53

WH

22

BN

54

BN

23

WH

55

WH

24

BK

56

BK

25

WH

57

WH

26

GN

58

GN

27

WH

59

WH

28

OR

60

OR

29

WH

61

WH

30

GY

62

GY

31

WH

63

WH

32

VI

64

VI

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

17

ED

Colour
Tape

WH

BL

A/B
Wire

Colour
Tape

YE

A/B
Wire
WH

BN

WH

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

136 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ContinuationColour code for 128 pair system cable


ITM

Bundle

65

BL

ITM

Bundle

WH

97

BL

66

BL

98

BL

67

WH

99

WH

68

YE

100

YE

69

WH

101

WH

70

BN

102

BN

71

WH

103

WH

72

BK

104

BK

73

WH

105

WH

74

GN

106

GN

75

WH

107

WH

76

OR

108

OR

77

WH

109

WH

78

GY

110

GY

79

WH

111

WH

80

VI

112

VI

WH

113

82

BL

114

BL

83

WH

115

WH

84

YE

116

YE

85

WH

117

WH

86

BN

118

BN

87

WH

119

WH

88

BK

120

BK

89

WH

121

WH

90

GN

122

GN

91

WH

123

WH

92

OR

124

OR

93

WH

125

WH

94

GY

126

GY

95

WH

127

WH

96

VI

128

VI

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

81

ED

Colour
Tape

WH

BL

A/B
Wire

Colour
Tape

YE

A/B
Wire
WH

BN

WH

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

137 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ContinuationColour code for 128 pair system cable


ITM

Bundle

129

YE

ITM

Bundle

WH

161

YE

130

BL

162

BL

131

WH

163

WH

132

YE

164

YE

133

WH

165

WH

134

BN

166

BN

135

WH

167

WH

136

BK

168

BK

137

WH

169

WH

138

GN

170

GN

139

WH

171

WH

140

OR

172

OR

141

WH

173

WH

142

GY

174

GY

143

WH

175

WH

144

VI

176

VI

WH

177

146

BL

178

BL

147

WH

179

WH

148

YE

180

YE

149

WH

181

WH

150

BN

182

BN

151

WH

183

WH

152

BK

184

BK

153

WH

185

WH

154

GN

186

GN

155

WH

187

WH

156

OR

188

OR

157

WH

189

WH

158

GY

190

GY

159

WH

191

WH

160

VI

192

VI

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

145

ED

Colour
Tape

WH

BL

A/B
Wire

Colour
Tape

YE

A/B
Wire
WH

BN

WH

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

138 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ContinuationColour code for 128 pair system cable


ITM

Bundle

193

BN

ITM

Bundle

WH

225

BN

194

BL

226

BL

195

WH

227

WH

196

YE

228

YE

197

WH

229

WH

198

BN

230

BN

199

WH

231

WH

200

BK

232

BK

201

WH

233

WH

202

GN

234

GN

203

WH

235

WH

204

OR

236

OR

205

WH

237

WH

206

GY

238

GY

207

WH

239

WH

208

VI

240

VI

WH

241

210

BL

242

BL

211

WH

243

WH

212

YE

244

YE

213

WH

245

WH

214

BN

246

BN

215

WH

247

WH

216

BK

248

BK

217

WH

249

WH

218

GN

250

GN

219

WH

251

WH

220

OR

252

OR

221

WH

253

WH

222

GY

254

GY

223

WH

255

WH

224

VI

256

VI

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

209

ED

Colour
Tape

WH

BL

A/B
Wire

Colour
Tape

YE

A/B
Wire
WH

BN

WH

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

139 / 246

11.1.3 Colour code for 64 pair system cable

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Front view
A
WHITE

RED

BLACK

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

BLUE

ORANGE

ORANGE

ORANGE

ORANGE

WHITE

RED

BLACK

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

BLACK

YELLOW

YELLOW

BLUE

11

16

21

26

31

36

41

46

51

56

ORANGE

12

17

22

27

32

37

42

47

52

57

GREEN

13

18

23

28

33

38

43

48

53

58

BROWN

14

19

24

29

34

39

44

49

54

59

SLATE

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

COLOUR CODE C.E.I.

Rear view
A

GREEN

GREEN

GREEN

GREEN

BROWN

BROWN

BROWN

BROWN

SLATE

SLATE

SLATE

SLATE

WHITE

RED

BLACK

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

BLACK

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

BLACK

YELLOW

BLUE

61

66

71

76

81

86

91

96

101

106

111

116

ORANGE

62

67

72

77

82

87

92

97

102

107

112

117

GREEN

63

68

73

78

83

88

93

98

103

108

113

118

BROWN

64

69

74

79

84

89

94

99

104

109

114

119

SLATE

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

TURQ.

RED

BLACK

WHITE

WHITE

BLUE

121

126

ORANGE

122

127

GREEN

123

128

BROWN

124

129

SLATE

125

130

PURPLE

ORANGE

GREEN

= principal colour
= secondary colour

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

B
1
2
3
4

ED

= pair number e.g. 1st, 2nd pair, etc.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

140 / 246

11.1.4 Connection of line cables in case of JRSU

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

There are three possible methods to connect the line cables from the JRSU on the MDF.
The applied method should conform to the populated data on the system load tape, check the CAE info
or connection list for the method used.

All subscriber numbers are used. This means that all connection points on the MDF are used. The
24 pairs of the nonexisting line equipment are not connected to the MDF.

Subscribers are connected per blocks of 500. The nonexisting 24 line pairs are connected to the
MDF but not used (nonexisting DN). The next group of 488 lines is started on a new block (500
group). The terminals for lines 488 to 499 remain unused.

This method is a combination of the previous two. The 24 pairs of nonexisting lines are skipped and
the terminals are all used up to line 463. The terminals from lines 464 to 499 are not used and the
cabling starts on 500 for the next group of 488 lines.

Note: pairs of nonexisting lines.


Group 1 Pair 129 up to and incl. 144 (16 lines) Pair 385 up to and incl. 392 ( 8 lines)
Group 2 Pair 641 up to and incl. 656 (16 lines) Pair 897 up to and incl. 904 (16 lines)
11.1.5 General rules
If, after running the first few cables, it appears that there is too much excess cable, the excess length
should be cut off before the cable running is continued.
11.1.6 Connection of external alarms
There are 32 points for connection of external alarms available in S12 equipment.
More precisely, they are situated on PBA CLMA (points I00 up to I31) in Frack. Some of these, however,
can be reserved already for internal use in the system (I00, I06, I12, I18, I24, I30). Interconnection to the
external customer alarms is done on the MDF. For this purpose all 32 interconnection points are passed
to the MDF by a cable (CAE dependent) with part number 211 16699 XXXA (XXX codes the length of the
cable). Cable is coded in the CAE documentation of the Frack with 2KD...03.
Cable is terminated on a free block of MDF, determined by the customer.
Normal procedure for external alarm definition is that customer requests for external alarms, to be connected to S12, are mentioned in S12 questionnaire. Then they are worked out in SW data by CAE.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The peripheral assignment list gives the external alarms that have to be connected.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

141 / 246

11.2 Examples of difference MDFs

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

11.2.1 Connection block 71 (Krone)


See workflow

11.2.1

Action A1

Cables on cable grid to MDF/DDF have to be bunched and fixed with cable tie (cross tie).
> once per meter on horizontal grid
> once per rung on vertical grid

Action A2

Sort the cables over the MDF.

The sequence for cabling in row is:

vertical section

The first vertical section is reserved for special cables.

Route the cables in bunches on grid and fix them with cable tie (cross tie). Do not bundle cables in
PVCchannel.

Place MDF cables according to the labels in vertical and horizontal sections of MDF.

Example:
501 01 14

01

vertical section
row
Connector block element
double terminal

Action A3

Strip cable > approx. length 600mm

Leave 30mm of copper mesh (screen).

Wrap cables twice with adhesive tape.

Stick the screening on the support and tighten the screw with torque wrench 80Ncm on underside
of screening. Put the protection cap on the screw head.

Tie cable on underside of horicontal support.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Remark: The MDF cable screening is dependent on customer design engineering.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

142 / 246

Action A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The connection block for 256 pairs with a length = 900mm extends over 5 vertical sections (1 basic
unit).

Caution:

Do not overwind the screw when you tighten the nut with ratchet handle!

Action A5

Place wires radial in connector block terminal according to cablecodetable for 64 / 128 pair cable.

Place a pair in every cable guide of connector block terminal. Do not draw the wires tight in cable
guides.

Action A6
Example (Test with TESTOKOM 804)

All MDF cables 64x2x0,5 and 128x2x0,4 have to be checked before connected to MDF.

1 Drawing shows a MDF cable 64x2x0,5 with 8 connectors (10 x 2 pole) labelled with
A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H. Connectors have to be checked in pairs (see table).

Drawing shows a MDF cable 128x2x0,4 with 16 connectors (10 x 2 pole) labelled with
A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,J,K,L,M,N,P,Q,R. Connectors have to be checked in pairs.

Test device for wires (SEL tool)

Rotary switch for selection plane I, II and III

Rotary switch for selecting the wire to be checked.

Testokom 804 (buzzer)

Headset with amplifier 708

Testing line between MDF and rack

Wire test pliers for notching of wires

Caution:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Use only the specific test devices for cable checking!

The cable test is invalid with a wire or test probe at the cable plug.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

143 / 246

YE
OR
YE
GN
YE
BN
YE
GY
WHBL
BL
WHBL
OR
WHBL
GN
WHBL
BN
WHBL
GY
RDBL
BL
RDBL
OR
RDBL
GN
RDBL
BN
RDBL
GY*
BKBL
BL
BKBL
OR

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
37
38
35
36
33
34
31
32
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
29
30
27
28
25
26
23
24 1)

Connector GH

BKBL 1
2
GN
BKBL 3
4
BN
BKBL 5
6
GY
YEBL 7
8
BL
YEBL 37
38
OR
YEBL 35
36
GN
YEBL 33
34
BN
YEBL 31
32
GY
WHOR 9
10
BL
WHOR 11
12
OR
WHOR 13
14
GN
15
WHOR
16
BN
WHOR 29
30
GY
RDOR 27
28
BL
RDOR 25
26
OR
RDOR 23 1)
24
GN

Colour code

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
37
38
35
36
33
34
31
32
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
29
30
27
28
25
26
23
24 1)

Connector EF

Colour code

WH
BL
WH
OR
WH
GN
WH
BN
WH
GY *
RD
BL
RD
OR
RD
GN
RD
BN
RD
GY *
BK
BL
BK
OR
BK
GN
BK
BN
BK
GY *
YE
BL

Connector CD

Colour code

Connector AB

Colour code

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Test tables

RDOR
BN
RDOR
GY
BKOR
BL
BKOR
OR
BKOR
GN
BKOR
BN
BKOR
GY
YEOR
BL
YEOR *
OR *
YEOR *
GN *
YEOR *
BN *
YEOR
GY *
WHGN
BL
WHGN
OR
WHGN
GN
WHGN
BN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
37
38
35
36
33
34
31
32
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
29
30
27
28
25
26
23
24 1)

Remark:
1)Setting at wire test equipment
Action A7
Rules for jumper wiring in MDF 71
1

from horizontal

upwards

vertical

from horizontal

downwards

vertical

from horizontal

in same row

horizontal

from vertical

in same vertical section

vertical

from vertical

in another vertical section

vertical

in same vertical section


from horizontal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

from horizontal

vertical

upwards or downwards
in another row

horizontal

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

144 / 246

11.2.2 Connection block 95Q (Quante)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

11.2.2

General:
The connection block 95Q will be mounted at MDF 71 on the horizontal side with the trough, in the same
way like the HCA linking strip. For the installation at the MDF 55 replace the installed angle bar with the
angle bar for MDF 71. The connection block 95Q consists of 64 modules with 8 pairs and has a mounting
length of 900 mm. Compared with the connection block 71 the connection block 95Q offers the double
amount by the same mounting length. The connection block 95Q can be used in two variants:
1.

block with 512 pairs, i.e. 64piece with 8 pairs

2.

block with 128 pairs, i.e. 16piece with 8 pairs

Caution:

Pay attention for the right installation of connection block (see drawing A1).
Install only one connection block with 128 pairs in a row horizontal at MDF 71.
Reason: overall length = 4 x 228 mm = 912 mm

Action A1

Lay cables to the connection block 95Q in vertical channels without transpositions.

The connection block 95Q with 512 pairs covers 5 vertical sections of the MDF 71.

Example: Cabling of connection block 95Q over vertical sections 502 505. Vertical section 501 is empty.
Maximum 8 subscriber cable (64 x 2 x 0,5) per connection block can be connected, i.e. 2 cables have to
be laid per vertical section.
Action A2

Install the ground sheet with the clamp at the crossarm and fix it with a threaded bolt M5x8.

Strip the cable to an approx. length of 600 mm. Leave 30 mm of copper mesh where it is, wrap the
cables twice with adhesive tape.

Install the cables at the copper mesh with the cable clamps at the ground sheet and tighten them
with the torque wrench 80 Ncm. Put the protection caps on the screws.

Action A3

Make the horizontal installation of connection block 95Q at the MDF 71 in the same way like the installation of connection block SM71. In case of installation at MDF 55 install the angle bar for MDF
71. The fixing parts (nut M4, tooth washer 4,3) are constituents of connection block 95Q.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Caution:

Pay attention by installation of connection block terminal 95Q for the right mounting position. The small openings (a) have to be pointed upwards . (see detail A).
Do not overtighten the M4 nuts!

Action A4

ED

Place wires radial in connection block terminal according to the cablecodetable. The numbering
is from above downwards 8 x a/b and from left to right, one cable 64x2 for 8 terminals.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

145 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Use one cable 128x2 for 16 terminals.

Place a pair in every cable guide of connection block terminal. Do not draw the wires tight in cable
guides.

Mount a marking strip for 16 connection block terminals. For protection of wires install the covers.

Action A5

Push the connection block terminals on the trough till the locks on top and bottom snap on. For removing of connection block terminals unlock the locks in arrow direction and take away the terminals
to the front.

The contact strip is a part of the connection block terminal.

Action A6
Caution:

Use only the Quante standard tool for connecting of the cable conductors.

Inserting the conductors, seize conductors with the cutoff device and conductor guide. Press conductors into contact end position. The cutoff device of standard tool must always point towards the
disconnecting plug orifice. A clicking sound indicates that the conductor is proberly connected and
the excess conductor end has been cut off.

Use the extraction hook for removing of the conductors from the module, in case of nonuse fold up
the hook in the handle.

Caution:

Pay attention for the right position of the blade when you cut the conductors. At
the standard tool a symbol is printed on the handle of sheare side.

Action A7

Vertical installation of connection block

The station cable is feed from the left into the top row of cable guide channels.

Connecting the conductors: The cutoff device of standard tool must always point towards the centre
of the module (disconnecting plug orifice).

Press conductor into contact end position. A clicking sound indicates that the conductor is properly
connected and the excess conductor end has been cut off.

Remove the excess conductor end.

11.3 MDF / LSAPLUS Profil


See workflow

11.3

Action A1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The distributors are completely installed supplied without connector blocks.

Action A2

ED

Bay 001 line 01, 02, 03 accomodates alarm wiring.


10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

146 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The inline modules have been installed in accordance with subcriber requirements and cabled system side.

Clip the connection modules at the frame.

The distance rings between modules are optional.

Remark: For cabling on rack LSAProfil

It is recommend to start with first module below and clamps the wire from left to right into contact
clamps.

Use the farb code list 64x2 / 128x2.

Action A3

Connect wires with LSAPlus insertion tool S (S=Sensor) after the bell test.

Press the wire with the insertion tool until the stop position (a click noise must be heared).

The wire will be cut automatically.

Sensor function: With the Sensor in its working position the wire will be cut only it is properly impressed
in the module.

11.4 DDF information

Connections on DDF side

transmission cables of the trunk modules have to be connected at the DDF side following the
numbering of the trunk module network addresses, starting with the lowest network address,
e.g.

NA = H30

connected to 1st position of DDF

NA = H31

connected to 2nd position of DDF

NA = H200

connected to 3rd position of DDF

NA = H210

connected to 4th position of DDF

cable label contains following information :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

DDF LOCATION

AA 50S

000000 00

211 85978 EAFA

2AL01C01

CABLE NUMBER

ED

TSU = NETWORK ADDRESS

CABLE SEQUENCE NUMBER

In the cabling list there are 2 cables per trunk module (LIN and LOUT)

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

147 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

LIN is the receive side

(Rx)

LOUT is the transmit side

(Tx)

Trunk Allocation Rules


1)

Trunk groups at TCElevel


One TCE can serve maximum 8 different trunk groups. These 8 include outgoing and bothway
circuits. Note, however, that a channel can be altered from an incoming to an outgoing circuit
just by means of a MMC command.
The recommended number of trunk groups per TCE is 5. An exception is made for manual
trunks. Here the allowed number of trunk groups per TCE is 24.

Note that some signalling systems cannot be mixed within the same module.
2)

Incoming and outgoing digital trunks can be mixed within TCEs. However, the transmission
system used can make restrictions e.g. distribution of incoming and outgoing trunks in groups
of 6 ccts (6 successive channels), and sometimes it is even not allowed to mix incoming and
outgoing trunks.

3)

From the point of view of reliability and grade of service it is evident to distribute a route :
c)

Over several TSUs

d)

Over several TCEs

e)

Over A and Bfeeding

4)

The distribution of trunks of a same route will be done on a horizontal way in the modules. Small
groups with quantities between 31 and 60 ccts will be distributed equally over 2 modules, e.g.
trunk group = 40 ccts will be distributed in 2 modules with 20 ccts.

5)

The route distribution for digital trunks to an analog environment will be done over min. 2 modules (if provided). The recommended distribution of routes with < 120 ccts will be over max.
4 modules.

6)

For digital links between two exchange: Outgoing trunks of the originating exchange will be incoming trunks in the same channel in the destination exchange.

11.4.1 Example: DDF cabling / jumbering at LSAProfil


There are two possibilities to connect the cables 120 ohm at the DDF.

Connect as shown an example with LSAProfil

The cables can be wrapped at the DDF (see workflow 11.4.2 Action A1+A2)

See workflow

11.4.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A1

ED

Cabling and jumbering between two LSAProfil break strip with screen cable 1 pairs (120 ohm).

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

148 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A2

Connect the prepared cables (max. 8 cable 1x2x0,5) on LSA strip 8 x a,b,s between the both screen
sheet metal.

Connect the wires with LSA plus insertion tool.

11.4.2 DDF cabling at wrapframe


See workflow

11.4.2

Remark: Application only DTAG


Action A1
Prepare the 120 Ohm cables for wrapping on DDF
1

Remove the sheath, CUfoil and CUwire braid on a lenght of 150 mm.

The drain wire has to be insulated with 100 mm insulated tubing yellow/black.

The cable has to be through the hole next to the pin row. Fix the cable with a cable tie.

Action A2
Wrap frame connection with 120 ohm cables

Routing of 120 cable S02YS(ST)CY 1 x 2 x 0,5 shall be in accordance with cable list. Wrap the
wire to the terminal with special wire wrap tool. See Instruction for Wrapping Procedures 726 03717
DAJAASQH.

11.4.3 DDF cabling with coaxcable


See workflow

11.4.3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A1

Cut length of 75 Ohm cable according to the cabling list.

Connect coaxial angular socket. (See following mounting instuctions for coaxial jack.)

Put coaxial angular socket in socket plate and tighten with a coax. tube wrench.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

149 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Source: 24336 21081..086

Figure 2

ED

Mounting instructions for coaxial angular jack 1,6/5,6 screwable 75 ohm

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

150 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Source: 24336 21076

Figure 3

ED

Mounting instructions for coaxial angular jack

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

151 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Source: 24336 21076

Figure 4

ED

Mounting instructions for coaxial angular jack

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

152 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Source: 24336 21076

Figure 5

ED

Mounting instructions for coaxial angular jack

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

153 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Source: 24336 21081..086

Figure 6

ED

Mounting instructions for coaxial angular jack 1,6/5,6 screwable 75 ohm

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

154 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Source: 24336 21081..086

Figure 7

ED

Mounting instructions for coaxial angular jack 1,6/5,6 screwable 75 ohm

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

155 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ALCATEL

12

EXCHANGE
CABLING

214 38390 AABA AS

246
MDF
12.2.1

12.2

Cabling to

Install the
cable plug

A.2

BOTTOM CABLING

A.1

Sort the
cables

A.2

A.1

Cable
labelling

Mark
cables

A.1

Fix pins
on ladder

A.2

Cable
way

A.3

A.1

A.2

Mark
cables

Install
strain relief

Mark the
cables

A.1

Move the
cable box

Cabling to DDF

12.2.2

12.1

Cables to
MDF/DDF

Cable 128pair

12.1.2

12.1.1

Top cabling

Cable
clamp

A.3

Cable
way

A.4

A.5

Cable
clamp

Strip the
cables

A.6

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

12 EXCHANGE CABLING

Figure 43. Detailed workflow for exchange cabling

10

156 / 246

12.1 Cables to MDF/DDF

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

12.1

Action A1

Move the boxes containing MDF cables to a place near the exchange room and check if there is sufficient room to open the boxes.

Action A2

Open the boxes.

Remove all cables from the boxes, check quantity of cables against material list and store them near
the place from where cable laying will start.

Sort them according to cabling list.

DDFcables (2) and MDFcables (1) have to be sorted separatly.

REMARK: The minimum length of MDFcable must be equal or greater than 10m.
12.1.1 Top cabling
See workflow

12.1.1

Action A1

Install in all racks a strain relief at the top frame. (Not JK.. and JZ.. rack)

The stress resisting rod must be installed before the MDFcable installation starts. Afterwards the
MDFcables have to be fixed with two crossed cable ties on stress resisting rod.

Action A2

Fix cable pins on the cable ladders, if available. (Conditional of sort from cable grid)

Action A3

Mark the cables on the MDF and the exchange side according to cabling list.

Lay the line and trunk cables on the cable grid.

Place the cables between the cables pins.

Cut the cables on MDF side if they are too long.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REMARK: Cable end with plugs is exchange side.

The cables must be labeled on the connectors with a cable number according to the cabling list. If
64P / 128P cables, only connector A will be labeled.

At JA00 rack, the MDF cables have to be connected by the cable clamp, on the top in sequence from
1 until 24.

Trunk cables to DDF should be feed through the cable clamps with four bundles of 10 cables.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

157 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Caution:

Make distribution of cables in the clamps evenly.


Avoid free spaces >5mm in a cable clamp!

Action A4

MDF cabling should be always laid from a rack frame to the MDF.

Lay the cables on rack in curtain system.

Fix the cables on the cable grid approx. on every 4th rung.

Action A5

If there no cables are feed through a cable clamp the clamp must have always a contact to the wire
mesh of MDF cable support.

Push down the cable clamp for releasing of clamp from cable support.

Connect the cable in their specific position, then mark them where you will strip the cables at the cable
clamp.

Action A6

Strip the cable by using of the special cutting head piece for solder iron.

Open the plastic cover of the cable (100 mm) so that cable screen is not damaged.

Bring the cables at the cable support in their specific position. Hang the spring wire in the middle hole
of cable support and lock the clamp in position, so that is given a good contact. The cables have to
squeeze fast in the cable clamp.

Bundle up the cables to DDF in bundles of 10 cables and tie them with cable ties.

12.1.2 Top cabling with cable 128pair


See workflow

12.1.2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A1

The cables must be labeled on the connectors with a cable number according to the cabling list. Only
connector A will be labeled.

Label the cable connector on the right side with AR.

Lay the cables in curtain system and feed them in a bow to the right position.

At JA00 rack, the MDF cables have to be connected by the cable clamp, on the top in sequence from
1 until 12.

Contact the cable in the center of the cable clamp.

The empty cable clamps must be completely locked.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

158 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Lay the trunk cables to DDF in middle cable clamps on the top and bundle up the cables in bundles
of 10 cables and tie them with cable ties.

Pay attention that all cables have contact in the cable clamps.

12.2 Bottom cabling


Cabling under raised floor by forced air cooling.

We would like to give you the following guidelines and recommendations for the very large exchanges, with forced air cooling.
a)

it is recommended to place the airinlet from the airco in parallel with the cable ducts.
Otherwise, an additional resistance will be created.

b)

the airinlet should be placed opposite to the highest concentration of DDFcoax cables,
in order not to create an additional resistance in the airflow. This means far away from
the point in the switching room where the DDFcables leave that room.

c)

if this is taken care of, a free space of 200 mm in the airflow is acceptable. This free space
is to be measured between the cables on the floor, and the nearest obstruction (in this case
: tile or cable duct). Generally however, 300 mm of free space is advisable.

d)

it is highly recommended in all cases of forcedair cooling, certainly if the airco blows on
the cable ducts (not conform to recomm. A) to place all DDFcables on the floor in a curtain.

In a general sense, if forced cooling of the racks is used, a free space of 30 cm is advisable, and a free
space of 20 cm can be permitted if this space is located as to not obstruct the air flow to the main parts
of the exchange. However, if this can be avoided, by changing the height of the floor, it is better to take
30 cm free space.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Feeding and signal cables have to be separated in case they are running parallel but feeding and signal
cables may cross.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

159 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
n2

MIN
200

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

n1

n1+n2=min. 200

Figure 44. General bottom cabling

10

160 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Warning ! Cable feedthrough

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

To ensure that no electromagnetic radiation will either enter or leave the system, the following mandatory
requirements apply :

All cables entering/leaving the system must have good electrical contact between the screen and
the cable feedtrough, which is obtained by fixing the cable with pressure to the cable feedtrough.

Gaps in the cable feedtrough have to be avoided. This can be realized by distributing the cables
continuously. See example.

If gaps cannot be avoided (only a few cables in one outlet), the gaps and empty outlets should be
filled with pieces of gaskets.

x x
x x x

x x x

x x x

x
x

x x x

x
x x x

GOOD

x x x

x x x

x
x x

NOT ALLOWED

12.2.1 Cabling to MDF/DDF

See workflow

12.2.1

Action A1

Take the cables after unpacking, check quantity of cables and sort them according to cable list.

DDFand MDF cables have to be sorted separatly.

Mark the cables on the MDF and the exchange side according to cabling list.

The cables must be labeled on the connectors with a cable number according to the cabling list. If
64P / 128P cables, only connector A will be labeled.

The connectors have to be labeled at cable 64x2 with AH and the cable 128x2 with AR.

Cut the cables on MDF side if they are too long.

REMARK: Cable end with plugs is exchange side.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A2

Put the cable holders for curtain cabling.

Bring the line cables in the rack and run them straight to the point.

Lay the cables on rack in curtain system.

Mark the cable where you will strip at the cable clamp.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

161 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Strip the cable by using of the special cutting head of a length 100mm (piece for solder iron) so that
cable screen is not damaged.

MDF cabling should be always laid from a rack frame to the MDF.

Action A3

Group the cables 64x2 / 128x2 into the clamps for ground screening the cables.

Contact the cables in the middle of the cable clamps.

Empty cable clamps must be fixed with cable tie.

REMARK:
The cable sequence is important to go into the MDF uprights and have to be chosen so that no crossing
of cables is necessary to reach the correct position on the MDF.
12.2.2 Trunk cabling to DDF

See workflow

12.2.2

There are two possible types of trunk cable.


1

Cable 120 Ohm (1x2x0,5).

Cable 75 Ohm (coax)

Action A1

Lay the cable vertical and horizontal to the right position according to the cable list.

Trunk cables to DDF have to be feed through the cable clamps with four bundles of 10 cables.

Mark the cable where you will strip the cable for grounding in the cable clamps.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A2

Install the cable plug on koax cable as shown.

The screen must not have contact with the wire.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

162 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

10
13

Disk

13.1

A1

13 PERIPHERALS IN JK../JF..RACK

ED
ALCATEL

Peripherals

Installation
of disk

Formatter
A2

Installation
of MTU

IDTMTU

KennedyMTU

13.1.1

A1

A2

Open the
swivel frame

Fixing of MTU

A3

A4

Explanation Explanation
Cabling to Frack
to Krack
JK..JF..
A1

13.1.2

246

214 38390 AABA AS

Flat cable

Bending
flat cables

13.1.3

A1

Vertical flat
cable running

A2

Labelling
flat cable
A2

A3

A4

Routing of
flat cables
Power supply

Power connecting
at TRU

13.2

A1

A5

Cabling
formatter

A2

163 / 246

Power connecting

A3

A6
Plugging
at formatter

Power supply
terminator
A4
Converter

Plugging
at terminator

Cabling
terminator

Cabling
in Krack

A7

A8
Detail MTUcabling

A9

A10
Cable clamp

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Bild 45. Detailed workflow for peripheral equipment

13.1 Installation of disk and formatter


See workflow

13.1

Action A1
1

Loose the screws to arresting the front fixing in the right position. (Only if necessary!)

Install the disk according to the rack layout and fix the disk by hand tightening the knurled screws
at front and rear side.

Connect the power cables according to cabling list.

Laying of the flat cables (see also B Bending of flat cables)

Converter Connections

Action A2

Remove the formatter from support by unscrew of the M3x8 screws.

Install the DIL board on premounted distance bolts nuts.

Take the support and install it on premounted distance bolts with the nuts.

Slide the formatter module into the support and fix it with the screws.

Insert the socket from converter cables into support and connect it with formatter cable.

13.1.1 Installation of the magnetic tape unit


13.1.1

See workflow
Action A1

Installation of the IDT MTU

Install the two mounting blocks

Hang the MTU on the mounting blocks (2 people are necessary).

Install a safety block

on the cabinet.

under the lower mounting block and screw it on with the crosshead screws

M4x10.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Nylon spacer is screwed on the safety block.

Action A2
Installation of the Kennedy MTU

ED

Remove the fixing parts (screw M5x16, washer 5,3) which are mounted at the rack upright.
10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

164 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Set the MTU on the bracket and push it in. Field 02 / 03 = MTU mounting place.

Action A3

Open the swivel frame of the MTU.

Remove the keypad.

Install the fixing parts (screw M5x12, washer 5,3).

Screw on the keypad and close the swivel frame.

Action A4

Fix the swivel frame with the knurled screw.

Install the fixing parts (screw M5x12, washer 5,3).

13.1.2 Cabling JK.. JF.. rack


See workflow

13.1.2

Action A1

Explanation of cable termination at F rack

Action A2

Explanation of cable termination at K rack

13.1.3 Flat cables

General rules

0,91

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Cu wire

Insulation

Flat cables are only a little movable signal lines with solid copper wires.

Avoid parallel inline cabling of the flat cables.

Flat cables and power cables (230 V) have to be


layed separate.

Do not buckle the flat cables!

Do not lay the cables over sharp edges.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

165 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

minimum allowed bending radius of flat cables = 6 mm

common flat cables:


cable 43 mm wide 34x0,25
cable 63 mm wide 50x0,25

See workflow

13.1.3

Action A1
Bending rules for flat cables

The following figures show the change of direction of flat cables. The bendings of the cables are dependent on the marker trace at the cables. Marker trace
= connector position

Action A2

Cable connection Frack to Krack

vertical flat cable running in the F rack

In case of vertical routing put the flat cables between PVC profile and signal cables or between two
PVC profiles.

Arrest the PVC profiles with the lock fingers.

In case of flat cables with ferrites a strain relief has to be installed at the top position of the cable.

Action A3

Label the flat cable at the housing of connector A and at the existing adhesive tape A with the same
cable number.

Cable numbers starting with 1L or 2L are valid for peripherals.

The sequence of plug position is always from the top downwards > ABCDE

Place the flat cables between two cable clip fingers.

Action A4

Pay attention for the colour markings

The flat cables have to be prebended on the interrupted lines.

Lay the flat cables between rack upright and support

at the flat cables!

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A5

Lay a loop with the flat cables into the flat type cable clamp

Lay the flat cables vertical through the cable clips

Close the locking at the connector

Connect the power supply for terminator

ED

.
7

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

166 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Before opening the MTU swivel frame , loose the cable loop of the power cable for MTU from the
cable clamp 3 .

Action A6

Unscrew the screws approximately the half way

Push the bracket back

. Lift the bracket and plug in the flat cables.

and fix the screws

Action A7

Pay attention for the colour markings

at the flat cables!

Action A8

Pay attention for the colour markings

Caution:

at the flat cables!

The contact housing and header

are not locked!

Action A9

Pay attention for the colour markings

at the flat cables!

The contact housing and header have to be locked.

Action A10

Put the flat cables into the cable clamp and snap it in by pushing down.

13.2 Power supply


See workflow

13.2

Action A1

Plug the cables to the termination strip according to the cable list.

Action A2 (only if two K Racks are standing side by side)

Plug the cables to the termination strip according to the cable list.

Lay the cables in the cable support of the Krack without fixing.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A3

If two Kracks are standing side by side the power supply will be laid from the top, if only one Krack
the power supply will be laid from below.

Adhesive clamps will be installed onsite.

Action A4

ED

Power supply : converter 1  terminator A


converter 2  terminator B

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

167 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ALCATEL

14

Suite
Assembly

214 38390 AABA AS

246

14.3

Doors

A1

A2

SEL
version

A3

Bell
version

14.4.1

A2

A1

Overlegth
Cable channel

CELabel

Suite
labelling

Endpanel
labelling

A1

Mount the
doors

A1

A5*

Cross
member

14.1.2

Jracks

A4

Cover without
extension BAT
plates

A5

Cross
member

A3

Extension
H to Jrack

Place the
label

A3

A2

A1

A4*

14.2

A4

PVCcover

14.4

14.5

A2

Install
supports for Endpanel
endpanel
70mm

A1

Holder
for cable
channel

Lock up
covers

A3

Install
Lbracket

14.1.1

Overview
for install
Extensions cable channel

Shielding
power rack

A2

Types of
top cover

Covers on
power rack

A1

Suite and rack


labelling

Interuption
of suites

14.1

Covers

Different
covers

Covers on
supports
A7

A6

A2

Install top
rack cover

Top cover
for bottom
cabling

A1

Install
cable holder
A2*

Signal
lamps

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

14 SUITE ASSEMBLY

Bild 46. Detailed workflow suite assembly

10

168 / 246

14.1 Covers

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow

14.1

Action A1

Different covers

Action A2

Different types of top rack covers

14.1.1 Extension on H or E family


See workflow
Caution:

14.1.1
Pay attention for the completeness of contact springs and the correct seat in
their carriage on all doors, cable channels, covers etc.! Replace damaged contact
springs by new springs.

Action A1

Overview for cable channel installation when PRA standing on left or right side.

Action A2

Mount the holder for cable channel on top rack edge.

The length of cable channel A is dependent on the rack distance C. Calculation of cable channel:

A = C D + (2 x 46)

Small tolerances arising during the rack installation can be equalised by elongated holes at the holders
and at the cable channels. Align the holder with rack edge.

In case of overfull cable channels there are two solutions:

A second cable channel can be installed directly next to the first.

Connect both channels of both ends with a clamping sheet metal.

An two holders a wide channel can be installed.

Action A3

If extension from Hrack with Jrack, install cable channel always on Jrack.

14.1.2 Jracks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

See workflow

14.1.2

Action A1

ED

Screw the cable holder on the top frame according to the rack type.
10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

169 / 246

The cable supports used in Zrack are different from those used in the other racks

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

at Krack :
at JZrack

at all other racks :

2 x 211 03895 AAAA


1 x 211 03895 AABA
1 x 211 03534 AAAA
1 x 211 03895 AAAA
1 x 214 28667 AAAA

Action A2

Place the top rack cover on the rack top.

Small differences on the top rack covers can be equalised with pushing by hand.

Screw on the spherical handle.

Make sure there is a good contact between top rack cover and cable channel.

After mounting the cover hang the cross member at front and rear side in the hole of top cover and
cable channel. (see page before)

Action A2*

Install signal lamps and covers.

Action A3

Install Lbracket (only on begin and end of rowes, when no cable channel mounted).

In case of space cooling, an airbaffle has to be installed in subrack 5.

Action A4

Screw rack support and upper hinged plate together on the top frame.

Screw the lower hinged plate and cover (only for top cabling) on the bottom frame, screw the screws
into the end panel.

Hinge the end panel in the upper and lower hinged plates and then screw the fixing screws (below).

Action A4*
End panel 70mm
This end panel is below at the bottom side open for bottom cabling.
For topcabling this opening must be locked completely.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Preparing the end panel 70mm for top cabling

The coverplate at the bottom side of the end panel must be installed on the rear side. It is
preinstalled at factory, but it can be, that it has to be changed onsite. The reason is, that at factory
cannot be differentiated between left and right end panel.

The cover 214 30396 AACA (bottom support) must be installed additionally to the support 214 30396
AAAA (see on page before).

Action A5 ( for racks without filter unit)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

170 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Place a cross member between the joints of two racks.

Saw out the pre-punched cut-outs for supports for cable grid with a jig saw. Remove the burr at the
cutting edges with a flat file.

Insert the grid covers into the guide slots at rear and front side of cable holder.

Lock up the locks with a screw driver.

Make sure there is a good contact between grid cover and top rack cover.

Action A5* (for racks with filter unit)

The installation is the same as Action A5

Action A6

A one part cover only for bottom cabling without filter unit.

The fixing is the same as the covers on pages before.

Action A7

Cover the grid cover at each support with brackets and fix them with spherical handle.
large bracket : between rack end panel
small bracket : between rack rack

14.2 Covers on power rack


See workflow

14.2

Action A1

After installation of connecting plates BAT and BATRET at power rack, place the top screen cover
on the inner housing and screw together.

Action A2

Put the rear cover on the rack.

Put the front cover on the rear cover.

Lock up the covers with a screw driver.

Make sure there is a good contact!

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A3

Insert the fastening clip from below in the PVC-cover.

Place the front and rear PVC-covers and push together.

Action A4

Power rack cover without extension BAT / BATRET plates.

Break out the necessary openings with a screw driver.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

171 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

14.3 Doors
See workflow

14.3

Action A1
Before hinging the doors pay attention to following :

Completeness of contact springs.

Seat of contact springs in their carriage.

Damaged contact springs as a result of transport.

Tilt the door a bit, so that it can be hanged into the lower hinge bolt.

Put the door in vertical position and click it into the upper hinge bolt.

By pulling down the upper lock, the door can be unlocked again.

Install always doors with a lock at front side!

14.4 Suite and rack labelling


See workflow

14.4

Action A1

The end panels have to be labelled with trademark Alcatel.

Splices have to be dry, fat and dustfree for labelling.

Trademark Alcatel : Remove foil and stick it on the end panel according to measures

Number labels :
Remove the base material at rear side

Stick on the label according to measures and press it.


Remove the foil on front side 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A2

All top rack covers have to be labelled at front and rear side with a rack position label.

Number labels :
Remove the base material at the rear side

Stick on the label according to measures and press it down.


Take care for the stop edge!
Remove the foil at front side 2

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

172 / 246

Letter labels: Stick on the label properly aligned with the number label, in the same way as the number
labels.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

At the first rack of a suite

14.4.1 CELabel
General
In case of installation of exchanges ALCATEL 1000 S12 inside Europe with Jracks. In these exchanges
only the JFrack with network address 0 has to be labelled with a CELabel.
See workflow

14.4.1

Action A1

Place the CELabel

14.5 Interruption of suites


See workflow

14.5

Action A1
cable channel extension
Realize a cable channel extension over 2500 mm with standardized cable channel.

Rule for determinating the length of cable channel:


Standard channel length + 100 mm = cable channel length LX
Example : 992 mm + 100 mm = 1092 mm
* Drill the holes on site.

Screw the cable channel connection on the bracket.

Screw the cable channel connection with cable channel.

Action A2 (SEL version)


A suite interruption can be delivered alternatively with one, two or three cable channels.
If lower cable channel is used mount the end panels and cable channels before cabling.
Action A3 (BELL version)
This version is only possible if no cable grid support is installed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Cut the cable channel at the rack side for cable insertion and install a PVCprotection profile

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

173 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

10

15 ILLUMINATION

ED
ALCATEL
246

214 38390 AABA AS

Figure 47. detailled workflow illumination

Illumination

15

Install
Installation channel
upper or below
channel
15.2.1

A1

Mount channel
on profil rail
A2

Feeding
power 230V

A3

Fixing of cable
channel to wall
A4

Installation
of profiled rails
on wall

A5

Installation of
lamps
A6

Installation of
devices in
PVCchannel

A7

A8
Connection of
lamps

174 / 246

15.1 Part of customer

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

As agreed with the customer, the following parts and/or installation work will be provided:

Installation of cable channels along the main gangway.

Installation of on/off switches with sockets and junction boxes per suite of racks.

Exchange rack lamp 76 for illumination of aisle area.

Interface or interchange points for lighting shall be the junction boxes for each suite.

Exchange rack lamp 76


Lights shall exclusively serve to illuminate aisle area between suites. Rack lamp shall be mounted on lamp
carriers (profiled rails) using insulated brackets. On suite 1, lamps shall be mounted on front and rear.
Lighting will be sufficient for 3 m aisle width.
Two types of rack lamps 76 are available:
Ktype

= lamp switched capacitively

Itype

= lamp switched indictively

Rack lamps are marked at the exterior with K or I.

Mains connections to 230 V may only be provided by a locally approved qualified electrician.
Before switching on the rack lamps, the power connections must be checked for a possible mixup of the wires.
Lamp housings must be potentialfree!

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

CAUTION

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

175 / 246

15.2 Number and positioning of lamps

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

+ = location of installation duct

11

66 10

366 10
X

187 9

80

rack

7
rack lamp

260 6

158 6

85

10

31

11

143 4

12

88

13

45

14

135 3

15 10 90

54

16 11

number of suites per circuit (16A)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

distance X in mm
number of lamps
number of racks per suite

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

176 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

inductive lamp

capacitive lamp
I

03

02

suite 01

Figure 48. Positioning of lamps

rack lamp

distribution box

circuit 1

circuit 2
switch
socket
suite 04

suite 03

suite 02

suite 01

type of cable: H05VV U3G 1,5


H05VV U4G 1,5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

distribution of circuits per suite:

circuit 1 = suite 1,3,5...


circuit 2 = suite 2,4,6...

Figure 49. Cabling schema

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

177 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Wiring layout:

rack lamp

distribution box

PE
L1
N
switch

Pay attention to protective measures for power current !

socket

wire

cable type

blue

black

H05VVU3G 1,5
yellow/green

H05VVU4G 1,5

brown

Attention !
Work only voltage free!
Connect the wires according to table on switches, distribution boxes and rack lamps.

15.2.1 Installation of cable channel

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

See workflow

15.2.1

Action A1

ED

Top cable channel Power feed of rack lamps if cable channel is topmounted.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

178 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Installation channel upper

Installation channel below

Bottom cable channel Power feed of rack lamps if cable channel is bottommounted.

Action A2

230 V power feeds shall be installed loosely in PVC channels. Within the same suite, cables shall
be run in the upper chamber of 3chamber profiled rail.

Action A3

Measure required length of cable channels, cut to size, and drill holes.

Mount on profiled rail using screws and sliding nuts.

Action A4

Measure required length of profiled rail to wall and cut to size.

Align profiled rail in relation to wall using water level and mark positions of drill holes for mounting
brackets.

Drill holes, insert dowels and mount brackets on wall.

Fasten profiled rail using brackets.

Action A5

Measure required length of cable duct, cut to size and drill mounting holes.

Align using water level and mark positions for drill holes on wall.

Install vertical channel between cable duct and profiled rail.

Action A6
Only, if using inset connection boxes!

Insert inset connection box into profiled rail of cable duct. Flip lever in box to lock in place.

Wire switch and socket and connect. See wiring layout.


1

Housing for socket/switch

Connecting box

Standard top cover

Fa. Tehalit

Switch

Socket

Cover

Standard
items

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A7

Assemble brackets and lights at desk.

Snap bracket with light into profiled rail. Fasten bracket in place by tightening screws and sliding
nuts.Attention ! Overtightening may result in bending bracket.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

179 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Action A8

Strip cable to a length of approx. 100 mm.

Insert cable through rear cable entry point.

Connect cable to terminal as follows :Blue wire = N Black wire = L1Green/Yellow wire = (PE)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

180 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ALCATEL

16

JRSU
JR00 with
JR03

214 38390 AABA AS

246
16.2

Mounting
of MAAirbaffle

Exchange
cabling

16.1.3

16.1.1

Installation
JRSU

A1

Install
Airbaffle

A1

A2

Extension
of fuses

Distribution
of cables

A1

Install
fuses

Bottom
cabling
A3

A2

Connect
power cable

A4

Cable
128pair

A3

Designation strip

16.1.2

16.1.4

A1

Cut profil rail

JRSU
labelling

Install profil
rails for
illumination

A1

Label
position

Adaption grid
RSU/JRSU

A2

A2

Write on
distignatiopn
strip

A3

Extension of RSU
with JRSU

Cable grid
to an existing
grid

A4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

16 JRSU

Figure 50. Detailed workflow for JRSU

10

181 / 246

16.1 General

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

On-site pre-installation check.


To avoid unnecessary problems during mounting and test of the RSU, check the RSU for any transport
and handling damage.
The JRSU is mounted in a normal System12 rack.
The racks will be delivered to site equipped and with intra cabling of units.
In case of extension inside of rack, you have to install the additional fuses on TRU and have to connect
the cable.
ONE SHELF VARIANT JR01 A1

Line BPA
first half
UPPER

second half
LOWER

Contr. BPA
incl. 2 St. Converter

Figure 51. JRSU one shelf subrack


The one shelf version will consist of a pure RSU with 256 analog lines or 112 digital lines or a mixture of
analog and digital lines.
TWO SHELF VARIANT JR02 A1

Line BPA
LOWER

Contr. BPA
incl. 2 St. Conv.

Converter
BPA

Converter
BPA

Line BPA
UPPER

Figure 52. JRSU two shelf subrack

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

the two shelf version will consist of a RSU unit with 512 analog lines or 240 digital lines or a mixture of
analog and digital lines.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

182 / 246

Contr. BPA
incl. 2 St. Conv.

Converter
BPA

Line BPA
LOWER

Converter
BPA

Line BPA
UPPER

Converter
BPA

Line BPA
LOWER

Converter
BPA

Line BPA
UPPER

Converter
BPA

Converter
BPA

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

THREE SHELF VARIANT JR03 A1

Figure 53. JRSU three shelf subrack


The three shelf version will consist of a RSU unit with 976 analog lines or 480 digital lines or a mixture of
analog and digital lines.
SUBRACK FOR TRANSMISSION UNIT

TRANSM.
TRANSM.
BPATIFA8 BPATIFA8

TRANSM.
BPATIFA8

TRANSM.
BPATIFA8

Figure 54. Subrack for Transmission Unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The transmission unit will consist of maximum four transmission back panel (BPATIFC8) and will be placed in a physical RSU rack when it is required. The transmission unit can serve maximum four physical
RSU units.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

183 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Physical rack and top rack unit


The positioning of physical RSU inside of rack is dependend on kind of cabling (top or bottom cabling).
The rack layout will be defined by CAE.
In case of top cabling the rack have to be equipped from top, in case of bottom cabling from bottom.

Top Rack
Unit

01
02
03
00
40
56
0708
09
11
01 2
1314
15
11
61
78
19

71
72
73
77
45
7677
78
78
98
01
8283
84
85
8867
88 9

subrack 02

subrack 03

subrack 04
emty
(possible air
baffle)
subrack 06

subrack 07

subrack 08

rear view

Figure 55. JRSU Rack Layout

16.1.1 Installation of JRSU


See workflow:

16.1.1

Action A1
JR03A1
JR03A1 is equipped with a three shelf subrack. The fuse assignment is dependend on the position of
subrack in the rack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Example:
If there is a three shelf JRSU in subrack 0204, the fuse assignment will be as follows:
Fuse numbers A01A04 (BATA) on fuse positions 0205 and fuse numbers B71B74 (BATB) on fuse
positions 7275.
Action A2

ED

In case of extension of fuses in TRU remove at first the blind plate, than insert circuit breaker up to
click into place.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

184 / 246

Action A3

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Designation strip for TRU fuses and whose converter assignment:


In case of extension enter the missing datas with a black permanent pen.

Action A4

Connect power cable according to STANDARD RACK CABLE LIST ( 21407509 AAAAJG)
on top rack unit.

Explanation of STANDARD RACK CABLE LIST 214 07509 AAAAJG


In case of extension inside of rack the additional fuses have to be installed on TRU and the cables have
to be accordingly connected. The connection points for cable plugs are defined in the STANDARD RACK
CABLE LIST 214 07509 AAAAJG resp. in the exchange dependent Cabling List.

SEQ

CABLE
FUNCTION

A01

BAT FUSE A01


BAT DISTR BAR A01
BAT FUSE B71
BAT DISTR BAR B71
BAT FUSE A01
BAT TLB A01
BAT FUSE B71
BAT TLB B71
BATRET DISTR BAR A01
BAT TLB A01
CONV 01 BATRET
CONV 01 BAT
BATRET DISTR BAR B71
BAT TLB B71
CONV 02 BATRET
CONV 02 BAT
BAT FUSE A01
BAT DISTR BAR A01

A02
A03
A04
A05

A06

B01

CABLE PART NR
CABLENGTH

CABLE
NUMBER

S
E
L

211 03161 AEKA


01S 0.20
211 03161 AEKA
01S 0.20
211 03161 AWKA
01S 0.90
211 03161 AWKA
01S 0.90
211 27935 ACGA
01P 2.60

1 QN . . . 01

211 27935 ACGA


01P 2.60

1 QH . . . 02

211 03161 AEKA


01S 0.20

1 QN . . . 05

C
*
C
*
C
*
C
*
C 1 C
*
D
A
B
C 2 C
*
D
A
B
C
*

1 QN . . . 02
1 QN . . . 03
1 QN . . . 04
1 QH . . . 01

Sequence
Example:

01 : T02 : : 01
01 : T02AA01
01 : T72 : : 01
01 : T72AA01
01 : T02 : : 02
01 : C18AA01
01 : T72 : : 02
01 : C88AA01
01 : C18AA03
01 : C18AA02
02 : 37BB25
02 : 37BB31
01 : C88AA03
01 : C88AA02
02 : 57BC25
02 : 57BC31
01 : T02 : : 01
01 : T02AA01

6
7

EXPLANATIONS:
1

C C CABLE
H O TERMINAT
N N

A01
serial number

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Code for JRSU variant and transmission unit and location in the rack.
(See STANDARD RACK CABLE LIST 214 07509 AAAA_JG sheet1)

Figure 56. Standard rack cable list

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

185 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Cable function
Example:
BAT FUSE A01
BAT DISTR BAR A01

Connection cable from fuse A01 to Distribution Bar


on rear side of Top Rack Unit.

Cable designation
Example:

211 03161 AEKA


01S 0.20

Cable part number

Cable length = approx. 0,20 m


Kind of cable > singlewired
(01P = kind of cable > onepair)

Cable number

(see also CDERULES 211 01072 AAAADS)

Example: 1 Q N . . . 01
serial number
rack number
row number
Cable function

0RA
1QA
1QH

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1QN
1QP
3AA
3AC
3AD
3CA
3CB

ED

internal connection cable between BATRET and EG


EGCable from converter or backpanel to backpanel or
to bus bar
BAT/BATRETconnection cable from TRU to converter
or backpanel
BATconnection cable inside of TRU or backpanel
other intra power cable
BATA (DC/DC) from PRA to rows
BATB (DC/DC) from PRA to rows
BATRET from PRA to rows
EGintermeshing between rows (TOPcabling)
EGintermeshing between rows (BOTTOMcabling)

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

186 / 246

Kind of cabling (SEL)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Example:

C
C = CAE Cabling ( S = STANDARD INTRA )

Cabling inside of rack (CHN=channel)


Example:

2
cable channel 2

cable channel2
(CHN 2)

cable channel2
(CHN 1)

rear view

Designation of plugs (CON=connector)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Example:

ED

A
B
C
D

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

187 / 246

a) Cable termination on subrack


01

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Detail X
Connector

25

33

*)
Example:

*)

02 : 57 B C 25
*)

Terminal number C25


(see detail X)

D B
D B
D B
E C A E C A E C A

D B
E C A

*)
Segment designation
Subrack drill
hole number 57
63

57

01

Segment A

01

33
58

Segment B

01

33

rear view of subrack

X
01 = TRU

connector
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
009
810
11
113
2115
416
17
18
19 71
72
73
74
75
76
778
779
80
81
82
884
385
86
87
88
89

02 = subrack 02
03 = subrack 03
04 = subrack 04

06 = subrack 06
07 = subrack 07

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

08 = subrack 08

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

188 / 246

b) Cable termination on top rack unit


Example1:

01 : T71 : : 02

01

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

terminal number 02
plugin position 12

02

circuit breaker

TRU (TOP RACK UNIT)


T71

TRU (TOP RACK UNIT)


T01

..

..

T19

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

T89

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

..

Terminal 01
Terminal 02

BATA

BATB

front view

Example2:

01 : C 18 AA01
terminal row
terminal number 18
connection bar on rear side of TRU
T = connection bar on front side of TRU
TRU (TOP RACK UNIT)

connection bar on rear side of TRU

18

71

89

*)

19

01
. . . . AA01
. . . . AA02
. . . . AA03

*)

01 : Txx AA01

01

circuit breaker

01
02
03

02

01 : Cxx AA01
01 : Cxx AA02
01 : Cxx AA03

01 : Txx : : 02

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

01 : Txx : : 01
side view

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

189 / 246

16.1.2 Install profil rails for illumination

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow:

16.1.2

Action A1

Cut profile rail to required length.


Profile rail length 1752 mm= 852mm+900mm standard profile rail

In case of a stand alone JRSU pay attention for enough profile rail length for lighting!

Action A2

By extension of RSU with JRSU you have different cable grid height. According to drawing you have
to make an adaption of cable grid.

The wide of cable grid is dependent on the existing construction.

The profile rail length for lighting for the first JRSU rack is 1480 mm. Only in case of a further extension, you have to cut this profile rail to a length of 878 mm. (flush with the outer margin of profile rail
over grid support). Now is the extension of cable grid possible with standard lengths (900mm,
1800mm...) without cutting.

Action A3
This adaption is only for extension of one RSUrack with one JRSUrack. Further extensions are impossible!

The grid supports for RSUracks are 20mm heightadjustable. Therefor you can find different grid
heights in RSUexchanges.

Use grid supports for suite height = 2500 mm for JRSU extensions.

For JRSUextensions install the profile rail for lighting to the height=2500 mm.
See detail A for this adaption.

Cut profile rail at RSU for cable grid to required length. See version 1.

The adaption of cable grid of JRSU is dependent on grid support height of installed grid support at
RSU.
max. grid support height > see version 2
min. grid support height > see version 1

The wide of cable grid is dependent on the existing construction.

Action A4

In case of extension of JRSU racks under an existing cable grid from RSUracks do not install a grid
support in this racks, because not enough space for standard supports left.

Caution:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Pay attention for max. distance  1250 mm between ceiling fixing!

Install an additional cable grid if not enough space on existing grid.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

190 / 246

16.1.3 JRSU Exchange cabling

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow:

16.1.3

Action A1
Distribution the cable is dependent of the kind of cable typ. (see chapter 12 cabling to MDF/DDF too).

Maximum cable number of JR03 full equipped:


16 MDF cable 64x2x0,5
or

8 MDF cable 128x2x0,4

4 cable LIN1LIN4 (120 Ohm 1x2x0,5 or 75 Ohm koax cable)


4 cable LOUT1LOUT4 (120 Ohm 1x2x0,5 or 75 Ohm koax cable)

All cable 2x for full equipped rack with 2 JR03

Kind and number of cables is dependent from equipment of rack resp. JRxx. If possible route cables
vertical from MDF cable holder to plugin position. Pay attention for a even distribution of cables in
cable clamps. Avoid free spaces in cable clamps. In case of subequipped rack, bind cable with cable
binder. Pay attention for good contact in clamps.

Action A2

Cabling with cable 128 pairs.

Lay the cables in curtain system and feed them in a bow to the right position.

Action A3
Bottom cabling

Lay the cables on rack in curtain system. (Cable 64pair and 128pair)

Contact the cables in the middle of the cable clamps.

Empty cable clamps must be fixed with cable tie.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Rack layout
GR. 1

GR. 3

GR. 2

GR. 4

GR. 5

GR. 7

GR. 6

GR.8

ALCN = 16 Analog Lines (AL)


ISTA = 8 ISDN Lines (DL)

POU

POU

POU

POU

COMM.

POU

POU

POU

PARTS

ED

POU Comm. parts : TAUC


8

(1)

RNGF

(1)

DTRx

(2)

CALC

(2)

ECFC

(option)

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

191 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

GR. 1 :

16 AL + 56 DL

GR. 2 :

16 AL + 56 DL

GR. 3 :

64 DL

GR. 4 :

64 DL

GR. 5 :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

64 DL

ED

BPA
POS.

Numbering
MDF Lines

Cable
No.

01
03
05
07

000 015
016 031
032 047
048 063

1
1
1
1

ALCN

09
11
13
15

064 079
080 095
096 111
112 127

2
2
2
2

ISTA

33
35
37
39

128 143
144 159
160 175
176 191

3
3
3
3

ALCN

41
43
45
47

192 207
208 223
224 239
240 255

4
4
4
4

ISTA

17
19
21
23

256 271
272 287
288 303
304 319

5
5
5
5

25
27
29
31

320 335
336 351
352 367
368 383

6
6
6
6

49
51
53
55

384 399
400 415
416 431
432 447

7
7
7
7

57
59
61
63

448 463
464 479
480 495
496 511

8
8
8
8

ISTA

01
03
05
07

512 527
528 543
544 559
560 575

9
9
9
9

ISTA

09
11
13
15

576 591
592 607
608 623
624 639

10
10
10
10

ALCN

Boards

ISTA

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

192 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

GR. 6 :

64 DL

GR. 7 :

56 DL + 16 AL

GR. 8 :

56 DL

33
35
37
39

640 655
656 671
672 687
688 703

11
11
11
11

ISTA

41
43
45
47

704 719
720 735
736 751
752 767

12
12
12
12

ALCN

17
19
21
23

768 783
784 799
800 815
816 831

13
13
13
13

ISTA

25
27
29
31

832 847
848 863
864 879
880 895

14
14
14
14

ALCN

49
51
53
55

896 911
912 927
928 943
944 959

15
15
15
15

57
59
61
63

960 975
976 991
992 999

16
16
16
16

ALCN

ISTA
NOT EQUIPPED

16.1.4 JRSU labelling


See workflow:

16.1.4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Action A1

All top rack covers on front and rear side will be labelled with a rack position label.

Remove the basic material from the label pocket at the rear side and stick on the pocket according
to measures and press them at the covers on front and rear side.

Put the labels with the base material in the label pocket.

Position labels which are not available in mounting material have to be cut on site

Cut the small label for labelling of RSU and put it in the small label pocket.

The end panels will be labelled with trademark Alcatel only at gangway. Splices have to be dry and
fat and dust free for labelling.

Action A2

ED

Write the JRSU number with a permanent pen on the TRU designation strip. Take the number from
the JRSU placement list.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

193 / 246

16.2 Mounting of MAAirbaffle

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See workflow:

16.2

Caution:

Before install the AIR BAFFLE remove the protection coating (if existing). Do not pull the
protection in the near of racks, because electrostatic can destroy components of the
rack.

Action A1

The Airbaffle is only installed in case of space cooling (equipment without false floor forced cooling).

17 FINAL TOUCH

Protection against spread of fire


CAUTION

Are all cable passages and cable channels covered with fire resistant material?

Preface
This chapter is intended to assist the site responsible to remove all anomalies detected at the end of the
installation, before the hand-over to the customer.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This chapter covers the following areas :

Visual inspection of the installation.

Visual inspection of cables and connectors.

Touching up possible damages.

Check the safety.

Spare parts inventory.

Clean-up

Check tools and instrumentation.

Action A1
Visual inspection of the installation :

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

194 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Check if all power cables are connected in there terminals and tied-up.

Check all power cables ends are protected with thermoretractil protections.

Check if all racks are grounded.

Action A2
Visual inspection of cables and connectors :

Check if all cables are orderly laid in their supports.

Check if all cables are connected to their right position, marking them on the cable list.

Action A3
Touching up possible damages :

Check all racks for possible damages and touch them up, first with anti-corrosive paint.

Check the doors for possible damages and touch them up.

Check the alarm panel for possible damages and touch them up.

Action A4
Check the safety:

Check that all auxiliary tools, covers, loose parts etc. are removed.

Check that all connecting points with dangerous voltages (DC 60V) are covered with the foreseen
covers.

Check that all screw connections are tightened with the required torque.

Check that the enclosure is correctly installed and no cables are catched at (sharp) edges.

Check that all doors are closed and the doors with lock are locked.

Action A5
Spare parts inventory :

Check all customer spare parts are available, according the corresponding specifications.

Action A6
Check tools and instrumentation :

Check all tools for possible defects, damages or looses and write them on the appropriate report.

Check all instruments for possible misadjustment damages or looses.

Action A7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Clean-up

ED

Collect and remove all documentation used during the installation period.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

195 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Check if all protections have been removed in the rooms where the installation works have been carried out.Rooms and equipment have been cleaned and are dust free.

Check if the storeroom and clockroom have been cleared.

Collect all cancelled drawings and return them to the corresponding office.Any other drawings remain
in the locked filing cabinet.

18 ANTISTATIC FLOOR
Installation of antistatic floor depends on supplier. Please consult related documentation for installation.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Precautions


Work benches, stools, and floor mats should have a conducting surface connected to earth. Personnel must earth themselves to the conducting surface before handling staticsensitive components
and assemblies.

Before removing PBAs from the equipment racks, personnel should discharge any static by touching
the metal frame of a rack.

A conducting floor mat is recommended for the work area (The floor is covered with an antistatic material which is connected to the system ground).

All tools that come into contact with staticsensitive components should be at the same voltage level
as the conducting work surfaces and floor mats.
These tools include soldering irons, oscilloscopes, power supplies, and metal parts of tools and fixtures that are used to hold, assemble or test PBAs.

Components and assemblies must be handled only by trained personnel in staticcontrolled work
areas. Components and assemblies may never be handled by their leads.

Personnel handling staticsensitive components and assemblies must not wear or use clothes made
of wool, nylon, or any synthetic material. (Such fabrics are major sources of static buildup).

Gloves and finger covers, unless made of cotton, must be avoided when handling components or
assemblies.

Before cleaning a PBA, the damage preventive equipment must be disconnected to allow the PBA to
be cleaned thoroughly. The damage preventive equipment must be replaced upon completion of the
tasks.

Synthetic brushes must not be used for cleaning equipment. Dry cleaning should also be avoided.

A single PBA to be shipped should first be wrapped in a conducting synthetic bag or in aluminium foil.
The PBA should also be packed in a polyethylene transport box.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

196 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

PBAs must not be handled or carried by any of the mounted components.

PBAs must not be handled by the goldplated contact terminals, and no direct pressure must be applied to the components.

Connector pins must not be touched.

PBAs may not be touched with wet hands.

Fingers or palms must not be placed on the conductor paths. PBAs should always be handled by the
edges.

Connection boards must not be inserted using force.

Rough cleaners or erasers must not be used to clean the goldplated contacts.

The PBA must not be marked with a lead pencil or any other writing instrument.

The soldered side may not be rubbed, scratched, or scraped with sharp or rough objects.

PBAs must be placed with the soldered side down when removed during maintenance operations.

Modifications, repairs, or adjustments should not be made to the PBA in the exchange.

PBAs may not be stored in an area where the air is polluted with smoke, dust, dangerous gases, or
other airborne particles that may damage the PBAs.

PBAs must not be stacked sidebyside or on top of each other with the surfaces or components in
contact.

Spare PBAs must be stored in their appropriate polyethylene boxes. The boxes should always be
kept closed except when access to their contents is required.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

197 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ALCATEL

19

MINI RSU

19.3

Outdoor
JRSU

19.2

Mini RSU

A1

Main power
connection

A1

Mounting
in 19 rack

A2

Battery
connection

A2

Mounting
in S12 rack

A3

Remove
protection

A3

Mounting
To the wall
A4

Cabling
of RSU
A5

Power
supply

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19 THE MINI RSU / OUTDOOR JRSU

Figure 57. Detailed workflow for JRSU

10

214 38390 AABA AS

246

198 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The mini RSU can be mounted in a 19 rack, in a System 12 rack, on a wall or in an outdoor cabinet depending on the customers requirements.
See workflow:

19.2

A fully equipped JR04 provides


96 analog or 48 digital line
free mixing of analog(digital lines
up to two 2 Mbit/s links
two positions for transmission PBAs erving multidrop
Action A1
The mini RSU can be mounted in a 19 rack without any adaptions. Attach the subrack to the rack frame.
Action A2
For the installtion in a System 12 J-rack an extension bracket has to be installed at the rack frame. After
this the mini RSU can be installed at one side to the bracket at the other side to the rack frame.
Action A3
For the installtion to the wall a special wall mounting kit ( 214 42798 AXAA) is needed.
For a single RSU the upper mounting kit (214 42798 AAAA) is needed, for a double RSU the lower kit
(214 42798 ABAA) is needed.
Action A4
Connect the outgoing cables with cable clamps at the grounding plate.
Action A5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The JR04 is supplied with 48V battery voltage. Connect the cable from the rectifier at the fuses.
Connect the BATRET (EG/SG) cable at the grounding plate.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

199 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

ALCATEL

20

MINI RSU

19.3

Outdoor
JRSU
A1

Main power
connection
A2

Battery
connection
A3

Remove
protection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

20 THE OUTDOOR JRSU

Figure 58. Detailed workflow for JRSU

10

214 38390 AABA AS

246

200 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 59. Foundation outdoor JRSU

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

201 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 60. Fastening iron for outdoor JRSU

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

202 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 61. Lifting the outdoor JRSU

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

203 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

16 qmm YG

Figure 62. RAU JR05 (rear view)


To avoid unnecessary problems during installation and testing the following brief visual check shall be performed before the installation commences :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Onsite preinstallation check

ED

Check the cabinet for typical transport and handling damages.

Ensure that the four fixing plates required to secure the cabinet to the foundation are fastened
to the transport pallet.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

204 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Ensure that the Lifting Sling Frame assembly and two lifting slings are available. (The lifting
components are not supplied as part of the cabinet assembly. The installing party is responsible
for the acquisition of the necessary components)

The Cabinet shall be supplied mounted to a special transport pallet and completely covered by
an antistatic plastic sleeve. This sleeve is only used to keep the cabinet clean during transport.
The sleeve shall be intact on arrival on site.

Suitable lifting crane or truck jib is available. (Under no circumstance shall the cabinet be lifted
manually !)

Check that the foundation is complete with fixing studs, nuts and washers and that all necessary
cables with specified additional length have been brought to the foundation.

The JRSU cabinet is designed as a selfsupporting unit but is required to be securely fastened to
a suitable foundation. The foundation is to be supplied by the local Teladministration and shall be
suitably designed to suit local ground conditions, I.e. soil types, frost protection etc... The below
ground design of the foundation is therefore not described in this document. The appropriate drawings specify the above ground requirements pertaining to the JRSU Plinth details.

The foundation shall normally be produced as a reinforced concrete structure with precast fastening
iron as shown on the figure.

On the figure the cabinet plinth is shown removed for clarity. The plinth is not readily removable from
cabinet on site.

All cables which are to enter the cabinet shall have a minimum length of 4 m above the foundation
prior to installation.

In addition to the basic mechanical requirements for the foundation, a suitable grounding point shall
be provided within the open area allocated for cabling. The grounding point shall have the provision
to terminate a minimum of two cables with a cross sectional dimension of 16 mm2. The ohmic value
of the grounding point to the actual ground must be within the limits specified in the General System
12 Requirements. Inspection and connecting to the ground point shall be made by removing the rear
cover of the JRSU plinth.

It is the responsibility of the installing party to provide suitable temporary environmental protection.
In addition to the ambient environmental requirements it is imperative that the Rules for the Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Components be strictly observed.To enable personnel grounding,
via a suitable wrist strap, four grounding points are provided on the inside of the cabinet positioned
on the side heat exchangers.

Unloading procedure

ED

Prior to lifting, the antistatic plastic sleeve protecting the cabinet must be lifted up at the bottom
area to enable the Lifting Frame assembly to be securely attached to the upper edge of the cabinet plinth.

Ensure that both toggle latches of the lifting frames are securely fastened before lifting
commences.

Using the two special lifting slings carefully raise the cabinet and transport pallet. Check that
the pallet has not been additionally fastened to the delivery truck, if so remove the additional
fastening.Lower the cabinet with pallet to ground level and relieve the tension in the lifting slings.
Remove the lifting frame assembly. Remove the cabinet plinth rear cover and replace the lifting
frame assembly. Reattach the lifting frame assembly to the plinth.Brush the top surface of the
foundation clean to ensure correct mating between the foundation and cabinet plinth.
10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

205 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Ensure that both toggle latches of the lifting frame are securely fastened before commencing.

Take up the slack in the lifting slings. Remove the transport bands from the cabinet/pallet avoiding personnel injury and remove the plinth to pallet fastening screws (The fastening screws are
located inside of the plinth and accessible through the back side of the plinth). Ensuring the correct orientation of the cabinet, front/back, lift and position the cabinet onto the foundation.
Centralize the cabinet to plinth whilst the tension is maintained in the lifting slings. Do not jerk
or use excessive force to position the cabinet on the foundation. Remove the special Fixing
plates (4 off) from the transport pallet and use to fasten the cabinet to the plinth. Only after the
cabinet has been secured to the foundation can the Lifting Frame assembly be removed. Note,
the lifting frame assembly is reusable and shall not be discarded.

Unpacking procedure

For normal transport only additional packing materials are required in the battery compartment
and in connection with the DC/DC converters. The packing material shall only be removed assuming the Environmental Requirements are maintained, and that Rules for the handling of
electrostatic components are observed.

Under no circumstances shall the cabinet doors be opened unless the correct environmental
conditions prevail ! If necessary a service tent should be used.

Due to the special requirements for the System contained within the cabinet, it is required that when
third party installation personnel are commissioned to connect the mains power, an observer from
either the Teleadministration or supplying ALCATEL house is present when the cabinet is opened
and actual connection is made.

Caution:

Connections to 230V can only be provided by a locally approved qualified electrican!

Action 1

The 230V mains power cable shall be routed through the cable nipples supplied in the cabinet bottom
plate and directly connected to the main filters in the cable inlet. The mains power cable have to be
introduced to the cabinet on the bottom area on the left side when seen from the rear side. The mains
ground cable shall be connected to the central grounding point/busbar.

Install a strain relief to protect theAC main power connections at the circuit breackers. Use a cable
tie, pull it thru two holes in the housing of the inlet box and fix the cable.

Note :It is important that the power cabling and general cabling are formed such that it is possible
to remove the side heater after cable installation.

Action 2

Connect the battery cable as shown in the picture.

Action 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

For transport the battery block is protected with polystyrene blocks. Remove this parts from the battery box before put in operation.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

206 / 246

21 HOW TO USE THE S12 J FAM. MOUNTING MANUAL

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This and the following chapters will describe the conventions, symbols and sequences used in the manual.

21.1 Definition of symbols.


Symbols are pictorials focusing on important details. They can express a prohibition, a warning, an injunction, an indication, a document or simply give an enlargement of a detail.
A prohibition symbol is always circular with a white background and a bold diagonal and circumference.
Prohibition can be for safety reasons as well for protection of the equipment against damage caused
by improper use.
The warning sign is a triangle pointed upward with a bold perimeter.
Use for the same reasons as the prohibition symbols.
Injunctions are reversed and as a circle represented.
Mainly used to indicate the mandatory safety means or manipulation method.
Indications are represented circular in a normal drawing.
Used to indicate the nature of the objects, tools etc.
The detail enlargement is always connected with an arrow to the detail location.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Reference symbol for exchangedependent documentation.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

207 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

21.2 Prohibition symbols

Do not touch the connector pins

No sharp bend

Do not hold by cord

No fire

No fixing required

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

208 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

21.3 Warning symbols

Anti slip ladder

Holes

Use of laser rayons

Inflammable

Raised floor without stringers


Never open the floor in a 90 degree corner.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

Never place tiles in a way that they can slip.

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

209 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

21.4 Injunction symbols

Use eye protection

Use warning ribbon

Hold rack by the frame

Use foot protection

Use protective gloves

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

210 / 246

21.5 Indication symbols

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Indicates the front or top


(E.g. - front of rack
- top of raised floor)

Subscribers cables, racks, etc.

Signal cables

Trunk cables

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Power cable, rack etc.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

211 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Earth potential, common ground

Forced cooling

Waterproof coating

Fireproof material

ED

10

ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS

246

212 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

21.6 Documentation symbols

Floor plan
- Graphical display of the physical location of all exchange
equipment within the building.

Cable list.
- List of exchange cables. Useful to verify rack, interrack
cabling of the exchange.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Connectivity list.
- contains info about all racks equipped in the exchange.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

213 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

21.7 Flow chart and drawing symbols


Label indicates an activity ref. nbr.

XXXX

Indicates an action ref. nbr.

AXX

21.8 Drawing layouts

1
2

3.a

3.b

3.c
4

1
3.d

3.e

3.f

3.g

4
0

A graphical representation of the detailed mounting instructions, exists for every activity. Every representation may consist of more than one page.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The layout of the drawing is as follows:

The upper part (1) contains all the warning, prohibition and injunction symbols, to be followed
throughout the related actions.

In the upper left part (2) of the first page you find a display on how the equipment will look like at the
end of the activity. On top of this a rectangle and a number, which is a reference to the detailed work
flow diagram.

The actions (3.a,b,c...) are situated on the rest of the pages, and to be read from left to right, and
from top to bottom. Every action has a circle surrounding an Anumber, which is also a reference
to the detailed work flow diagram. Symbols specific for a certain action are accompanying the corresponding drawing. (Eg. tools, indications, etc.)

A circle with an arrow pointing to an other drawing, indicates an enlargement.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

214 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Every tool has a unique Tnumber. (ref. to tool list.) Other numbers can give extra info. (Eg. tool
size)

Every part has an item number indicated by a rhombus. This is a reference to the material list.

At the bottom (4) of the page, a blank space of 2 cm is reserved.

A * indicates different options. Consult detailed workflow for more info.

21.9 Action flow on drawings


To install the ALCATEL 1000 S12 system, a number of main activities has to be performed. The sequence
of the activities can be found in chapter 4 Workflow.
Every activity consists of a number of actions to be taken. These actions can have a certain sequence,
which is indicated in the mounting activity manual as seen for a single item.
An action may have to be repeated for every rack or cable before you can move on to a next step. This
information can also be found in the chapter 4 of this document.
Every activity has a reference, followed by a number indicating the corresponding action flow. Optional
actions such as earthquake protection etc are indicated by an asterisk, and the necessary information can
be found in chapter 4.
The actions are not necessarily executed in alphanumeric order, for the correct sequence one should refer
to the work flows of this document.
The flow diagrams (general and detailed) should be interpreted as follows:

A rectangle indicates an activity.

A circle indicates an action.

A dotted line indicates an optional action.

An arrow pointing backwards indicates that an action may (dotted line) or should (full line) be executed more than once.

All the numbers used in the flow diagram should correspond to the numbers in the graphical mounting
instructions.

For every activity in the general flow exist one or more detailed flows.

22 GENERAL

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

22.1 Environmental requirements.

Required height between normal floor and lowest ceiling point is min. 3000 mm

Required height between raised floor and lowest ceiling point is min. 2500 mm

Required height between raised floor and lowest ceiling point, in case of top cabling is min. 3000 mm

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

215 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Required height under the tiles for bottom cable duct is min 200 mm, max. 650 mm. When main power or MDF cables have to cross under the cable duct or in case of forced cooling the min height is
300 mm.

Required height under the tiles in case of earthquake protection is 200 mm till 500 mm raised in steps
of 50 mm.

Gangways.

The equipment practice is based on different standards of gangways between the suites.

Gangway between the suites

Step
between the
suites

680

1200

780

1300

830

1350

880

1400

930

1450

980

1500

1280

1800

Main gangway.Recommended dimension : min. 1300 mm

Secondary gangway.Recommended dimension : min. 750mm When a secondary access isnt provided, the required distance between suite end panel and wall is min. 150 mm

Between pillar and end panel of rack is min. 350 mm. (When bottom cabling is used)

22.1.1 At start of pre installation.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Building conditions :

Construction activities finalized (dust free, plaster work finalized, windows glass and doors
mounted, staircases, paint.....)

Transport and packed storage conditions available in the building.

Power off, unpacked storage and installation conditions in the switching rooms.

Climatic requirements fulfilled.

Corrosive agents polluting the air within the specified limit.

Access to the building as required. (approaches ramps, sufficient access for the supply of the equipment, crane, hoist....)

Building safety provisions in place (screening of holes and cable ducts, fireextinguishers, available,
banisters, locks, ...)

Ambient light and overhead lighting available and operational in all locations of the activities.

Power, water and all other utilities available, power supply for tools in all locations of the activities.

MDF and DDF available for cable connection.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

216 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Raised floor available and free of obstacles inclusive earthing of the floor (if applicable).

Sanitary provisions available.

Telephone line available.

Cable passages through walls and ceilings.

Temperature and humidity for altitudes between sea level and 500 meters, the ideal temperature
should be between +10C and +30C within a relative humidity band of between 20 % and 80 %.

N.B.

Deviations from these figures are permitted. Consult the Equipment Engineer. At attended exchanges or during maintenance periods, the relative humidity must be at least 20 % in order
to avoid electrostatic problems which could be troublesome to personnel and may cause damage to the equipment.

22.1.2 At start of installation of the equipment

Switching room free of obstacles.

Cable ducts installed.

DC power and emergency power installed.

Fire detection and alarm system installed.

Aircooling system installed (if applicable).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

22.1.3 At start of test

All installation activities except final touch must be finalized.

DC power plant fully operational including emergency auxiliaries.

Transmission equipment available and operational (at least one connection to every direction).

Aircooling fully operational (if applicable).

Cleanliness in all locations of the activities.

Telephone lines of every remote exchange directly connected to the exchange under test.

Jumpering activities on MDF and DDF.

Earthing on MDF and DDF .

Fire detection and alarm system fully operational.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

217 / 246

22.2 Safety precautions

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

See instructions as in the general safety guide lines for field operations

22.2.1 Safety charts


NAME : ACETONE
Melting point : 95C; Boiling point : +56C; Density : 0.79; Vapour density : 2.0; Vapour pressure : 24K;
Flash point : 19C; Ignition temp. : 540C; Low. ex. lim. : 2.5 %; Upp. ex. lim. : 13 %; TLV : 750 ppm; Stel
= 1000 ppm; Condition : liquid; Solubility in water : 9999 G; Colour : Colourless; Odour : Typical odour

FIRE HAZARDS

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Extremely flammable
Reacts with oxidizing agents

No naked flame, hot points or


sparks
No smoking
Storage in safety tins

Fire extinguisher (carbonic


acid) drum (water)
Atomized water
Foam

EXPLOSION HAZARDS

PREVENTION

Moderate risk

Ventilation and exhaustion


Closed equipment
Explosion measurement
Explosionproof materials
Earthing during transfer or
pumpover operations

HAZARDS IN CASE OF
BREATHING

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Intoxicating
Irritating

Ventilation
Exhaustion
Closed equipment
Atmospheric measurements

Remove sideeffect, fresh air


and rest
Apply artificial respiration, if
necessary call industrial medical officer

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Breathing protection

HAZARDS TO THE SKIN

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Very irritating
Causes burns

Acidproof gloves
Workclothes

Rinse profusely with water

HAZARDS TO THE EYES

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Irritating
Causes burns

Acidproof goggles
Facemask

Prolonged rinsing with water


Call industrial medical officer

HAZARDS IN CASE OF
SWALLOWING

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Toxic

No eating, drinking or smoking


while working
Labelling and danger symbols

Do not make victim vomit


Rinse mouth with water
Let victim drink water
Call industrial medical officer

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

218 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STORAGE

PACKAGING

Away from ignition sources


Cool
Separate from oxidizing agents
Ventilation through the floor

Metallic drums
Safety tins

WASTE

LEAKAGE

Toxic waste
Do not discharge
Collect in sealable drums
Transport to recognized waste treatment firm

Collect liquid in sand/absorbent grains


Flush excess liquid with plenty of water

RPHRASES

SPHRASES

Extremely flammable

Keep in well ventilated place


Keep away from ignition sources no smoking
Do not breathe gas/smoke/vapour/aerosol
Take electrostatic discharge measures

Contains : Aceton

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Transport code : 1090

ED

Symbols : extremely flammable (F)

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

219 / 246

NAME : SULPHURIC ACID CHEM. PURE 4050 %

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Dissociation point : 340C; Vapour density : 3.4; Vapour pressure : 21006; TLV : 1 mg/m3 ppm; Condition
: liquid; Solubility in water : 9999 G; Colour : Colourless; Odour : Odourless

FIRE HAZARDS

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Not flammable
Fire hazard in case of reactions
Reacts with bases

No contact with flammable products


No contacts with bases

Atomized water

EXPLOSION HAZARDS

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

HAZARDS IN CASE OF
BREATHING

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Caustic

Ventilation and exhaustion


Atmospheric measurements
Do not breathe vapours

Remove sideeffect, fresh air


and rest
Call industrial medication officer

HAZARDS TO THE SKIN

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Caustic, causes burns

Acidproof gloves
Acidproof shoes
Boots
Impermeable clothes and gloves

Prolonged rinsing with water in


the emergency unit
Take off dirty clothes
Keep victim warm

HAZARDS TO THE EYES

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Caustic
Causes burns

Acidproof goggles
Facemask

Prolonged rinsing with water


Use eyerinse equipment
Call industrial medical officer

No risk

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Additional data : reacts with many metals (hydrogen), flammable substances (fire), alkalis (strongly)

HAZARDS IN CASE OF SWALLOWING

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Caustic

No eating, drinking or smoking


while working
Labelling and danger symbols
Always wash hands before eating
No foodstuff on the workstation

Do not make victim vomit


Rinse mouth with water
Let victim drink water
Call industrial medical officer

STORAGE

PACKAGING

Cool
Separate from flammable substances
Separate from bases

Hermetically sealed
Acidproof drums

WASTE

LEAKAGE

Neutralize
Dilute

Neutralize
Flush with plenty of water

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

220 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

RPHRASES

SPHRASES

Causes severe burns

Keep away from children


In case of contact with the eyes immediately
rinse profusely with water and call a specialist
Never pour water onto this substance

Contains : Sulphuric acid ... % Conc > 15 %


Transport code : 1831

ED

Symbols : corrosive (C)

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

221 / 246

NAME : THINNER 81030

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Density : 0.79; Flash point : +31C; Condition : liquid; Solubility in water : 0 G; Colour : Colourless; Odour
: Cf. solvents

FIRE HAZARDS

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Flammable
Reacts with strong acids

No naked flame or burning surface


No contact with acids

Put out fire with fireextinguisher


Atomized water
Alcoholresistant foam
Cool off drums and tins with
water

EXPLOSION HAZARDS

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Low risk

Ventilation and exhaustion


Earthing during transfer or
pumpover operations

HAZARDS IN CASE OF
BREATHING

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Intoxicating
Irritating

Ventilation and Exhaustion


Atmospheric measurements
Breath protection

Remove sideeffect, fresh air


and rest
Apply artificial respiration, if
necessary call industrial medical officer

HAZARDS TO THE SKIN

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Degreasing, irritating

Impermeable clothing and


gloves

Prolonged rinsing with water


Take off contaminated clothing
Wash skin thoroughly
Call industrial medical officer

HAZARDS TO THE EYES

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Extremely irritating

Goggles

Prolonged rinsing with water


Use eyerinse equipment
Call industrial medical officer

HAZARDS IN CASE OF
SWALLOWING

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Harmful

No eating, drinking or smoking


while working
Labelling and danger symbols
Always wash hands before eating

Do not make victim vomit


Rinse mouth with water
Let victim drink water
Call industrial medical officer

STORAGE

PACKAGING

Away from ignition sources


Ground ventilation
Separate from acids

Metallic drums
Hermetically sealed
Safety tins

WASTE

LEAKAGE

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

222 / 246

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Toxic waste
Do not discharge
Collect in sealable drums
Transport to recognized waste treatment

Neutralize
Collect liquid in sand/absorbent grains
Flush excess liquid with plenty of water

RPHRASES

SPHRASES

Harmful in case of inhalation


Flammable

Keep away from ignition sources


Avoid contact with skin and eyes

Contains :Butanol (Butylalcohol)

Xylene

Symbols : harmful (Xn)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

223 / 246

NAME : BISONTIX CONTACT GLUE

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Density : 0.88; Vapour density : 3; Vapour pressure : 10 k; Flash point : +0C; Ignition Temp. : 400C; Low.
ex. lim. : 1 %; Upp. ex. lim. : 11 %; Condition : paste; Colour : yellow; Odour : Cf. solvents

FIRE HAZARDS

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Highly flammable
Reacts with oxidants

No naked flame, hot point or


sparks
No smoking
Storage in safety tins

Fireextinguisher (carbonic
acid, BCF)
Atomized water
Foam
Cool off drums and tins with
water

EXPLOSION HAZARDS

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Moderate risk

Ventilation and exhaustion


Closed equipment
Explosion measurement
Earthing

HAZARDS IN CASE OF
BREATHING

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Intoxicating
Irritating

Ventilation and Exhaustion


Atmospheric measurements
Breath protection

Remove sideeffect, fresh air


and rest
Apply artificial respiration, if
necessary call industrial medical officer

HAZARDS TO THE SKIN

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Degreasing, irritating
Penetrates the skin

Acidresistant gloves
Workclothes

Rinsing with plenty of water


Take off contaminated clothing
Wash skin thoroughly
Call industrial medical officer

HAZARDS TO THE EYES

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Extremely irritating

Goggles

Prolonged rinsing with water


Use eyerinse equipment
Call industrial medical officer

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Additional data : Also contains heptane

HAZARDS IN CASE OF
SWALLOWING

PREVENTION

REMEDIAL ACTION

Toxic
Irritating

No eating, drinking or smoking


while working
Labelling and danger symbols
Always wash hands before eating
No foodstuffs on work position

Do not make victim vomit


Rinse mouth with water
Let victim drink water
Call industrial medical officer

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

224 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STORAGE

PACKAGING

Away from ignition sources


Ground ventilation
Separate from oxidants
Separate from acids

Metallic drums
Hermetically sealed

WASTE

LEAKAGE

Toxic waste
Do not discharge
Collect in sealable drums
Transport to recognized waste treatment firm

Collect liquid in sand/absorbent grains


Flush excess liquid with plenty of water

RPHRASES

SPHRASES

Highly flammable

Keep away from ignition sources no smoking


Use only in well ventilated places

Contains :Ethylmethylketone (Butanon) Toluene

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Transport code : 1133

ED

Symbols : highly flammable (F)

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

225 / 246

22.2.2 Safety rules for equipment under tension

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

For maintenance purposes and for extensions on existing exchanges, it happens that the field operators
have to work on equipments under low tension (48 or 60 V).
In this way it is possible to touch some parts under tension, which are only protected by heavy fuses. In
the switching racks 10A and in the power distribution rack 63A.
It is clear that such activities should be carried out carefully in order to avoid short circuits.
It is necessary to use appropriated and insulated tools for these activities and to remove all conductive
objects from the hands (rings, bracelets, metallic wrist watches, etc...).

22.3 General workmanship


Removing cable sleeve :
A cable sleeve can be removed with a knife or preferable with a cable knife. Care must be taken not to
damage the wires. To find the right adjustment of the cable knife, trial cuts should be made in a piece of
unused cable.

Use protective gloves

Bolts and screws :


All bolts of cable clamps should be tightened with a torque wrench. All other bolts and screws should be
tightened according the rules of proper workmanship.
Care must be taken that the max. torsion momentum of the bolts is not exceeded.
Following table can be used as a guide. It gives the moment in Nm for 5.8 and 8.8 type bolts, from M1
till M10, class ISO 898/1.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This type of bolts are general used in S12. All this info is according DIN 267 part 25.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

226 / 246

5.8

8.8

Nm

Nm

M1
M1.2
M1.4
M1.6

0.024
0.055
0.087
0.120

0.033
0.075
0.120
0.160

M2
M2.5
M3
M3.5

0.270
0.600
1.100
1.800

0.370
0.820
1.500
2.400

M4
M5
M6
M7

2.600
5.600
9.400
17.000

3.600
7.600
13.000
23.000

M8
M8 x 1
M10
M10 x 1

24.000
28.000
49.000
62.000

33.000
38.000
66.000
84.000

M10 x 1.25

54.000

74.000

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

SIZE

22.4 Instructions for dowel setting


1. Mounting of dowel at the wall

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1.1 Determination of screw length

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

227 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

length of dowel + thickness of fixed piece = length of screw

length of dowel + thickness of plaster + thickness of fixed


piece= length of screw

1
X
X

2
C
3
A

C
B

= anchoring depth of dowel into the wall

= dowel spread dircetion vertical to the wall

A
B

= anchoring holes  50 mm
= distance between holes in concrete  100 mm

= corner distance in concrete  50 mm / brickwork  100 mm

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2. Ceiling fixing with FZA anchor dowel


Concrete solidity class B 25 (min.)

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

228 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

60

Drill the bore hole of FZA anchor dowel with


the dust extraction device in the rotary hammer drill.

Bore hole diameter, undercutting and bore


hole depth are exactly tuned to the anchor. A
correct installation is ensured when the anchor sleeve is knocked in flush with concrete.

min. 130

14

FZA anchor dowel


(with nut and washer)
214 77747 AAAA

93

M 10

fastening component
10,5

max. 20

distance to corner

min.
120
min.
120

distance to edge
min.
120

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

min.
240

distance between holes

22.5 Instructions for drilling holes in concrete surfaces

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

229 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Using the machine with hammer action engaged drill at right angle to
the concrete until the integral depth stop reaches the surface.

To form the undercut hole swivel machine in a circular motion and


press hammerdrill firmly against concrete (12 rotations up to 14
mm and 35 rotations for 18 and 22 mm).

Place anchor in setting tool, push into drilled hole and drive the anch
sleeve over the end of the conical bolt until the sleeve fits flush with th
concrete surfac

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Position of steel anchor in place in concrete surface. Anchor slee


flush with concrete surface.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

230 / 246

22.6 Standard rules and conventions

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

22.6.1 Separation of power and signal cables.


Separation of power and signal cables in S12 is required for the following reasons:

Appearance; improved visibility.

To facilitate extensions.

To separate the heavy power cables from the lighter (weaker) signal cables.

It is recommended to bundle the 48 DC power cables and signal cables in separated groups in the under
raised floor cable ducts , side shielding and on top of the racks. In cable ducts, cables should not be
bounded.
Deviation from this rule is allowed when dictated by increased cable volume.
It is not allowed to route ACpower cabling together with the S12 power and signal cabling.
22.6.2 Bending rules.
Cables must not be bent in a too small angle.
When bending cables, next bending rules must be taken into account:

Power cables: Min. radius is 4 times the cable diameter.

Signal cables: Min. radius is 7.5 times cable diameter.

Strict observance of the above rules is necessary to avoid damaging the cables.

Optical fiber : Min. radius is 20 times cable diameter.

22.7 EMC rules


In an ideal environment (no voltage drop between the switching ground and the transmission ground), the
best transmission quality is achieved with both ends of the transmission line grounded. For EMC requirements, it is also better to have more grounding points. However if long cables are used it can be necessary
to have a single end grounded transmission line, e.g. RTMA BOARDS.
For the 2MBIT/S links, before disconnecting the ground of the screen wire, the source of the external current flow should be eliminated first.
CCITT recommendation G703 states in PTN 6.4 that : the outer conductor or the screen of the output port
shall be grounded for as well transmission equipment as for switching equipment

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

To be compliant with EMC requirement and with the electrical recommendation, doubled screened cables
are recommended. For S12, this is introduced from JRACKS on.
The S12 Advanced Equipment Practice (AEP) requires that all cables leaving or entering in the rack must
be screened.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

231 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Case 75 ohms : coax

LIN

AEP (RACK exit)

BPAJUMPER

Case 120 ohms : symmetric

LIN
AEP (RACK exit)

BPAJUMPER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

To be used if customer insists on nonearthed inner shield

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

232 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Case 75 ohms : triax

LIN
AEP (RACK exit)

Case 120 ohms : symmetric

LIN
AEP (RACK exit)

22.8 Power and earthing rules


It is not necessary to choose for a isolated installation of the S12 equipment if the exchanges will be
installed in buildings with a grounding (equipotential connections and ground grids) made according the
CCITT and ETSI rules.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

When there are doubts about the grounding structure of the building. Or when there are different systems
in the same building which are not connected to a common ground collector, a isolated installation of S12
is advisable.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

233 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

MAINS
INPUT
POWER
PLANT

Main
Power
Board

POWER DISTRIBUTION RACK (PDR) DG

A1

DC SUPPLY FOR
PERIPHERALS
AND DIRECT
CONSUMING
DEVICES

B1
BRANCH
A1

-48V

BRANCH
B1

-48V

FUNCTIONAL AND PROTECTION


EARTH (FPE)

FPE
FPE
RACK 01

TOP RACK
UNITS
(TRUs)

VERTICAL
BUS BARS
BRANCH A

BRANCH B
DC/DC
CONVERTER

DC/DC
CONVERTER

MDF GROUND BAR


TRANSM.
EQT.
AIRCO
OTHER
SAFETY
GROUNDS
RAISED
FLOOR

DC/DC
CONVERTER

BUILDING
GROUND

5V

DC/DC
CONVERTER

12V

5V

DC/DC
CONVERTER

12V

5V

DC/DC
CONVERTER

12V

PBAs
BACK PANELS
GROUND
CABLES

AC
POWER
GROUND

5V
12V

5V
12V

5V
12V

PBAs
BACK PANELS
GROUND
CABLES
ELECTRONIC GROUND (EG)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

EARTH
ELECTRODE

Figure 63. Power Supply and distribution simplified block diagram

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

234 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
ALCATEL

10

FPE

FPE

246

214 38390 AABA AS

Figure 64. FPE layout

3x 2
240MM
TO
POWER
PLANT

POWER
DISTRIBUTION
RACK I

FPE

OR 2
300 MM
2 x 95mm2
FPE
3x 2
240MM
OR 2
300 MM

2 x 95mm2
PDR2

235 / 246

TO FOLLOWING
POWER RACK
(2 x 95mm2 )

16mm2

-48 V

SUB. LINES
S12

FPE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

MDF

MAINS

NEUTRAL

POWER
PLANT

TRANSMISSION
EQT
FALSE
FLOOR

WATER
AIRCO

CENTRAL
HEATING

BUILDING GROUND
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

GROUND COLLECTOR
BUILDING

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 65. Overall Grounding System

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

236 / 246

HUBBEL
CONNECTOR
PLUG BOX
214 07303 XXXX

237 mm
500 mm

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

48 V/60V DC

DC/
AC

160-05304 ABAA 115V AC OUT


DC / AC
12V/60V

115VAC

500VA/350 W

160-05304 AAAA 230V AC OUT


DC / AC INVERTOR 500V A of 350

DC/AC

480/60V 230 VAC

H = 240 mm

INVERTOR
1

Note :

2
SEE NOTE

160-05304 AAAA : plug 1&2

= europ.

160-05304 ABAA : plug 1

= europ.

: plug 2

= americ

EUROPEAN MALE
CONNECTOR

local plug with fuse


AC network (220V)

LOCAL
MALE CONN.
200 mm
350 mm

8AB 09020 AAAA


SWITCH OVER BOX
1) automatic switch-over by
48V/DC failure

H = 150 mm

2) manual switch position for 220VA


netw. function

EUROPEAN FEMALE
CONNECTOR

51 mm

EUROPEAN MALE CONNECT.


543 mm
1AB 03815 0001

PC PC

distribution box 230 VAC (4 outlets)


with EUROPEAN FEMALE PLUGS

PRT

PC & PRT equiped with european male connector


length of feeding cable on PC & PRT is 15 m

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 66. Inverter

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

237 / 246

22.9 Reporting & administration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

22.9.1 Progress and status reporting


See the local compagny regulations & rules.
22.9.2 Problem reporting
See the local compagny regulations & rules.
22.9.3 Spare management and ordening specification
See the local compagny regulations & rules.

22.10 Fire prevention


After the cabling is finished, the cable channels in the building must be filled with fire resistant material.
This in accordance with local fire regulations.
The inlet of the JZrack is always covered to prevent short circuit by faling debruit into the rack.

23 DOCUMENT READING
23.1 General documentation
For info on how to read, cable list, connectivity list, peripheral assignment list, etc. see document 211
93244 AAAATQ.

23.2 Cable connection list


The purpose of the cable connection list is to show the information required during installation and maintenance for rapid and systematic checking of all cable connectors are placed within one rack.
The document type indicator is JN.
This list shall be worked out and numbered at exchange level.
On the first sheet, the document number, edition, date and the exchange name will appear.
The continuation sheets are worked out per rack.Each rack starts at a new sheet.
The heading of the document shows :
a)

The rack location

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Character

ED

1,2
3,4
5
6,7

=
=
=
=

floor
room
blank
suite

8,9

= rack position

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

238 / 246

b)

The rack mnemonic :

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

It is an 8 character field, left justified, to identify the rack with a mnemonic.


The list gives for each single line entry the connection location of a cable termination.
a)

Cable termination

Character

1,2
3,4
5,6
7,8

=
=
=
=

subrack position
colon
header position
segment

9,10

= position of first terminal

In the case of a distributing frame, the meaning of the characters may be different, depending on the
type of distributing frame.
b)

Cable number
It is an 8 character field, left justified for the number assigned to the cable.This is the same cable
number which is used for the cabling list (JC) and the cable placement list
(RC).

c)

Connector
It is a single character field that specifies a connector of a multiended cable assembly.

Example of cable connection list.

KABELVERBINDINGSLIJST LISTE DE CONNEXION DES CABLES CABLE CONNECTION LIST


Kolomlokatie
Emplac. de la baie
Rack location
Kabelnummer
Numro du cble
Cable number

C
O
N

02::01AA04

2AA96T01

02::01BA22

2AA96T01

02::03AA04

2AA96T01

02::03BA22
02::05AA04

Kabeleinde
Terminaison du cble
Cable termination

Kolom
Baie
mnemo :
Rack

AA 96T
Kabelnummer
Numro du cble
Cable number

C
O
N

02::47AA04

2AA96T04

02::47BA22

2AA96T04

02::49AA04

2AA96T07

2AA96T01

02::49BA22

2AA96T01

02::51AA04

Kabeleinde
Terminaison du cble
Cable termination

JR03A1

01

Kabelnummer
Numro du cble
Cable number

C
O
N

03::29AA04

2AA96T14

03::29BA22

2AA96T14

03::31AA04

2AA96T14

2AA96T07

03::31BA22

2AA96T14

2AA96T07

03::33AA04

2AA96T11

Kabeleinde
Terminaison du cble
Cable termination

23.3 Cable placement list


The purpose of the cable placement list is to show the sequence of the cable installations, the exact location of the connectors, and the routing of the cables.
The document type indicator is RC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This list shall be worked out and numbered at exchange level.


On the first sheet, the document number, edition, date and the exchange name will appear.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

239 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The continuation sheets are worked out in a way that the sequence of the cables is the intended sequence
of the installation.
Each cable is presented as a single or multiline entry. There are as many lines in the FROM columns
as there are connectors at the originating end of the cable; and as many lines in the TO columns as connectors at the terminating end.
Lists for extensions and modifications shall contain only the cable to be removed or added on that extension or modification. Cables to be deleted shall be listed first and preceded by the words deleted cables.
The group of cables to be added shall be preceded by the words ADDED CABLES.
The continuation sheets have the following fields in the heading :
a)

The fromfield contains :


2 characters for the floor2 characters for the room

b)

The TOfield contains :


2 characters for the floor2 characters for the room

In the list following fields are provided :


a)

Cable number
It is an 8 character field, left justified, to identify the number assigned to the cable.This is the same
cable number which is used for the cabling list (JC) and the cable connecting list (JN).

b)

Cable part number


It is an 14 character field, left justified, which specifies the part number of a cable assembly or a strapping plug.

c)

Connector
It is a single character field which specifies a connector of a multiended cable assembly.

d)

Rack position
It is a 4 character field to identify the suite in which the rack is located (2 chars.) and to identify the
rack (2 chars.) in which the cable connects.

e)

Cable termination
It is a 10 character field to describe the cable termination within a rack or within a distributing frame.

f)

Channel
It is a 1 character field to specify the cable channel (left, right or direct) in which the cable is to be
placed within the rack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

g)

Run
It is a 4 character field to specify the routing of the cable between racks, between suites and between
rooms.

Example of cable placement list.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

240 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

KABELTREKLIJST LISTE DE POSE DE CABLES CABLE PLACEMENT LIST


Van
Lokatie
Vloer
Etage
Floor

POWER & MDF


Kabelnummer
Numro du cable
Cable number

De l
Emplacement
Zaal
Salle
Room

C
O
N

KODE CODE

From
Location

Kolom
Baie
Rack
POS.

Naar
Lokatie

Vers l
Emplacement

Vloer
Etage
Floor

AA

Kolomlokatie
Emplac. de la baie
Rack location

C
H
N

Route
Run

C
O
N

To
Location

Zaal
Salle
Room
Kolom
Baie
Rack
POS.

2AW96T01

211 16704 BFAA

96T

04::24BA13

99Z

2AA96T01

214 07632 CAAA

96T

02::01AA04

96A

96T

02::01BA22

96T

02::03AA04

96T

02::03BA22

96T

02::05AA04

96T

02::05BA22

96T

02::07AA04

96T

02::07BA22

Kolomlokatie
Emplac. de la baie
Rack location

AA
C
H
N

5
00000/0063

23.4 Rack layout list


The purpose of the rack layout list is to show the information required during installation and maintenance
for rapid and systematic checking the printed boards equipped within one rack.
The document type indicator is HD.
This list shall be worked out and numbered at rack level.
The heading of the document shows :
a)

The pre equipped rack mnemonic :


It is an 8 character field, left justified, to identify the rack with a mnemonic.

b)

The pre equipped rack sequence


It is a 2 character field, to identify the sequence that this pre equipped rack is used.

c)

The pre equipped rack code


It is a 16 character field, to identify the pre equipped rack by his code number.

d)

The rack location


It is a 9 character field, to identify the position of the rack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Character

ED

1,2
3,4
5
6,7

=
=
=
=

floor
room
blank
suite

8,9

= rack position

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

241 / 246

The list of the document shows for each printed board the position in the subrack, the manufacturing information, the status indication, the printed board code and mnemonic.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a)

The location of the printed board


It is a 6 character field, left justified, to identify the position of the printed board within the subrack.

b)

The manufacturing informaiton


It is an 1 character field meaning the following :

= item delivered by own company

= material ordered by the company but manufactured elsewhere

= blocked item (slots which may not be equipped)

= valid candidate for a Hole. Used in case of Holes procedure.

= existing material, supplied in a previous order and reused in the same exchange.

= free of charge item

= not equipped item. Used in case of Holes procedure. Software information is provided in
CAESS/DPSS I/F files.

= item delivered by local supplier

= modified item; (e.g. new firmware loaded in existing PROM)

= not equipped, the item is part of the standard exchange (predefined) but not yet equipped in
the current order.
Item is provided in the installation tool kit.
Software information is provided to allow activation by installation people during test.

= no candidate for a Hole. Used in case of Holes procedure.

= take off material, removed in another exchange in the same area and reused in current order or delivered from customer stock.

= upgrade material in case of Hybrid exchanges.

c)

The status indication


It is an 1 character field meaning the following :

= existing situation or new rack.


In an original order or a new rack in the extension the status field is always blank.

= printed board which is added

= printed board which is removed

= printed board which is replaced.


In this case only one entry with the final part number (after extension) must appear

d)

The code of the printed board


It is an 14 character field allowing to identify the printed board by the code number.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

e)

The mnemonic of the printed board


It is an 8 character field, left justified allowing to identify the printed board by the mnemonic.

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

242 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

23.5 Explosion list


A

= Resale material

= Identification of bulk material

= Identification of services related to client orders

= Material already available onsite

= Direct shipments

= Material to be purchased locally

= Material to be purchased by client

= Material to be puchased or manufactured by engineering and to be delivered to shipping


department

= Manufactured by modelshop

= For record items

= Item to be delivered to shipping department

SX

= Item to be delivered to shipping department after assembling and separated test

= Takeoff material

= Detail item material listassembled part

= PEMs to be delivered on client order

The relation between the I, Land D items in the installation manual and the SX items in the explosion list
is as follows :
in partlist 771 YYYYY XBBA is I and SX numbering identical.in partlist 771 YYYYY XBBC is D and
SX numbering identical.in partlist 771 YYYYY XBBB is L and SX numbering identical.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The existing partlists are :


iron work
loose material
cabelducts
MDF, DDF cables

771 YYYYY
771 YYYYY
771 YYYYY
771 YYYYY

doors & shielding


power cables

771 YYYYY SBBE


771 YYYYY XBBF

ED

XBBA
XBBB
XBBC
XBBD

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

243 / 246

INDEX

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

NUMBERS

Covers, 19
Cross section, 67

2MBIT/S links, 76

D
A
Access to the building, 11
ACETONE, 63
ACID, 65
Action flow, 60
Activity, 59, 60
Air cooling, 62
Air cooling system, 62
Alarm system, 62
Anchoring, 48

B
BAT, BATRET CONNECTING, 67
BATRET branch, 67
Batteries, 14
Bending rules, 76
Bolts, 71
Bottom cable, 60
Bottom cabling, 108
Building conditions, 61
Building safety provisions, 61

DC power, 62, 76
DDF, 61, 62
diagrams, 6
Dimension, 61
dimensions, 17
Discs, 13
documentation, 6
Drawing, 59
Drawing layouts, 59
Drawing symbols, 59

E
Earthing, 62
Earthing rules, 78
Earthquake protection, 60, 61
EMC rules, 76
Emergency auxiliaries, 62
Emergency power, 62
Environment, 76
Environmental requirements, 60
Equipotential connections, 78
exchangedependent, 52

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

F
Cable, 60
Cable channels, 67
Cable clamps, 71
Cable duct, 60
Cable ducts, 62, 76
Cable lugs, 67
Cable passages, 62
Cable sleeve, 71
Cables, 13
CAE info, 13
Cartridges, 13
Climatic requirements, 61
Cloakroom, 12
Common ground collector, 78
Conductor, 76
Connecting plate, 67
Construction, 11, 61
Conventions, 76
conventions, 52
Converters, 17

ED

Field operations, 63
Fire detection, 62
Fire prevention, 83
Fire resistant material, 83
Fixing rules, 48
Floor tile, 19
Floorplan, 19
Flow chart, 59
Flow diagrams, 60
Forced cooling, 60
Frame, 13
Fuses, 67, 71

G
Gangways, 61
General rules, 13
General workmanship, 71

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

244 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

GLUE, 69
Ground, 24
Ground grids, 78
Grounding points, 76

H
N
Height, 60

I
indication symbols, 56
Indications, 59
indications, 52
Injunction, 59
injunction symbols, 55
injunctions, 52
Installation, 62
Installation activities, 62
instructions, 6
Instrumentation, 13
Insurance, 13
Ironwork, 13
Isolated installation, 78
Item number, 60
ITEM/TOOLINDEX, 6

J
Jrack, 17
JF, 19
JK, 19
JRSU subracks, 17
Jumpering, 62
JZ00 rack, 71

L
Labels, 13
Lighting, 61
Local fire regulations, 83

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

MDF Cables, 60
MDF/DDF, 13
MDF/DDF cabling / MDF connections, 1
mounting, 6
Mounting instructions, 59

Main activities, 60
Main power, 60
Main power cables, 71
Main power supply, 67
Marking the floor, 21
Materials, 13
MDF, 13, 61, 62

ED

NHfuses, 67
Normal floor, 60

O
Office availability, 12
options, 6
Output port, 76

P
Packed storage, 61
Packing list, 13
Parts, 14
PBAs, 17
Pedestal, 24
Peripherals, 13
Peripherals specifications, 13
Pitch, 31
Plugs, 13
plugs, 13
Polluting, 61
Populated data, 13
Power, 61, 76, 78
Power cables, 13
Power cables BAT, 67
Power parts, 14
Power rack, 13, 67
Power rack (PRA), 67
Power racks, 14
Power station specifications, 14
Power supply, 71, 61
Prohibition, 59
prohibition symbol, 52
prohibition symbols, 53
Protectors, 19

R
Rack, 60
Rack cables, 13
Racks, 19, 76
Raised floor, 12, 60, 61, 76

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

245 / 246

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Related actions, 59
Rooms dimensions, 12

S
S12 equipment, 78
S12 J fam. mounting manual, 6
Safety, 63
Safety provisions, 11
safety requirements, 1
Sanitary provisions, 11
Screen, 76
Screws, 71
Sequence, 60
sequences, 52
Shielding, 13
Side shielding, 76
Signal cables, 76
Software, 13
Software specifications, 13
Spare parts, 13
Specifications, 13
Specifications overview, 13
Standard rules, 76
Storage of materials, 14
Storeroom, 12, 14
Suites, 19, 61
SULPHURIC, 65
supervision, 6
Switching equipment, 76
Switching ground, 76

Switching room, 62
Symbols, 59
symbols, 52
System load tape, 13

T
Tnumber, 60
Tapes, 13
Telephone, 62
Test, 62
THINNER, 67
Tiles, 60
Tools, 12, 13, 59
Top cabling, 60
Transmission, 62
Transmission equipment, 76
Transmission ground, 76
Transport, 61
Transport wheels, 20

W
Warning, 59
warning sign, 52
warning symbols, 54
Weight, 17
Work flow, 60
Work flow diagram, 59

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT

ED

10
ALCATEL

214 38390 AABA AS


246

246 / 246